Isogen Option Switches & AText Reference Guide

Option Switches Reference GuideALIAS

Option Switches Reference Guide

ALIAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR INCI-DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

It is the policy of Alias Limited to enforce any and all rights relating to protection of this information. The information contained in this manual is proprietary in nature and may not be reproduced, copied or divulged in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Alias Limited. This manual has been provided pursuant to the terms of a contract or confidentiality agreement. Unauthorised distribution or disclosure of its contents is a violation of that contract or agreement and persons doing so may be liable for penalties as provided by law.

Copyright © 1991-2003 Alias Limited. All Rights Reserved.

Alias Limited1 Stuart Road, Manor ParkRuncorn, CheshireWA7 1TSUnited KingdomTelephone: +44 (0) 1928 579311Fax: +44 (0) 1928 579389Email: [email protected]

I-Sketch™, I-Sketch Classic™, I-Sketch Field™, I-Sketch Client™, I-Convert™, I-Export™, I-Run™, I-Tools™, I-View™, I-View CAD™, I-Data Integrator™, SPOOLGEN™ and ISOGEN™ are registered trademarks of Alias Limited.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Switches

Option Switches listed by number:

Click on an Option Switch name to access its information.

Option Switches listed by number: 1

1. Plotfile length 12. Cut piece numbering/list type 23. Drawing trim marks 44. Drawing text size 55. Co-ordinates - Connection/connectivity 76. Date output 87. Pipeline splitting - User control 98. Dimension line standout 119. Dimension form 1410. Drawing margin - Left 1611. Drawing margin - Right 1712. Drawing margin - Top 1813. Drawing margin - Bottom 1914. Drawing size - Standard postscript plotter size 2015. Drawing size - Height 2216. Drawing size - Width 2317. Flow arrows - Components 2418. Drawing frame - Program standard 2519. Sloping pipeline indication method 2620. Sloping pipeline indication limit 2721. Isometric type 2822. Cut piece add-on allowance 3023. Material list - Controls and File type 3124. Material list - Pipeline/drawing and Pipeline length units 3325. Material list and Title block- position 3426. Material list - Descriptions 3527. Material list - Text size 3628. Material list - Item code length 3729. Material list - Line spacing 3830. Material list - Continuation method 3931. Drawing output - File/screen 4132. Drawing output - scaling 4233. Revision/detailed marker 4334. Drawing output - Picture scale 4435. Drawing - Reserved areas 4536. Drawing output - Stacking value 4637. Drawing output - Stacking orientation 4738. Pipeline splitting - Automatic 48

ALIAS

by name

Switches

39. Spool piece identifiers 4940. Pipe supports 5241. Bore/Dimension/Weight Control 5542. Drawing viewpoint 5943. Pipe wastage factor - Area 1 6044. Pipe wastage factor - Area 2 6145. Pipe wastage factor - Area 3 6246. Pipe wastage factor - Area 4 6347. Pipe wastage factor - Area 5 6448. Pipe wastage factor - Area 6 6549. Pipe wastage factor - Area 7 6650. Pipe wastage factor - Area 8 6751. Pipe wastage factor - Area 9 6852. Equipment trim drawings 6953. Weld numbering 7154. Weld plotting 7455. Program messages - Run information 7556. Program messages - Isodat 7757. Program messages - Isoplot 7858. Clear screen 7959. Instrument identification 8060. Component tagging 8161. Insulation indication 8262. Tracing indication 8363. Printed output - Page length 8464. Pipe support identification 8565. Bolting units 8666. Co-ordinates - Supplementary 8767. Sloping pipeline - 3D skew depiction 9068. Sloping pipeline - Vertical branches 9169. Terminal type identification 9270. Skew indication - Branches 9471. Plotfile format 9572. Reserved 9773. Material part number enclosure style 9874. Material list accumulation control 10075. Weld number - Enclosure and prefix 10276. Material part number enclosure shape 10477. Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads 10578. Support Weld Number Enclosures 10779. Site Assembly Identification 11080. Dimensions - To valve centres 11281. Dimensions - Branches 11482. C of G / Weight output 11683. Spare switch 11884. Spare switch 11985. Spare switch 120

ALIAS

by name

Switches

86. Spare switch 12187. Spare switch 12288. Spare switch 12389. Spare switch 12490. Material control - Comdace file contents 12591. Material control - Comdace file controls 12692. DXF file units 12793. Spare switch 12894. Spare switch 12995. Component leg length 13096. Reserved 13197. Skew depiction - Individual / overall 13298. Spare switch 13399. Skew depiction - Style 134100. Skew depiction - Dimension line standout 136101. Skew depiction - Triangle hatching 137102. Skew depiction - Hatching clearance 138103. Spare switch 139104. Spare switch 140105. Spare switch 141106. Spare switch 142107. Spare switch 143108. Pipeline splitting - In tube 144109. Repeatability file content 145110. Ghost gaps 147111. Nozzles - Dotted 148112. Flow arrows - Pipeline 149113. Material control - Pipeline identification 150114. Specification break indication 151115. Tolerance - Angle offset 152116. Tolerance - Dimension offset 153117. Dimension round off 154118. Dimensions - Overall 155119. Dimensions / elevations - Vertical 157120. Tapping - Branch scale 158121. Tapping - Branch dimensions 159122. Tapping - Branch co-ordinates 160123. Instrument ID enclosure 161124. Flange rotation angles 163125. Reserved 164126. Reserved 165127. Isogen version / run date 166128. Fab friendly isometrics 167129. Interactive editing 169130. Development testing 170131. Development testing 171132. Development testing 172

ALIAS

by name

Switches

133. Development testing 173134. Development testing 174135. Development testing 175136. Development testing 176137. Development testing 177138. Plotfile - DGN link and ASCII text 178139. Development testing 179140. Development testing 180

Versions 320

Index 322

ALIAS

by name

etails

witches y numberwitches y name

D

SbSb

1. Plotfile lengthISOGEN

Switch Title Option Switch No.

OptionsOption Switch No.

Options

Related Program Development Specs. Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 1

1

1.0 APR 83NONE

This Option Switch is used to control the physical length of the Plotfile that is generated by the ISOGEN program. It is only necessary to invoke the use of this switch when using the 'Multiple Isometrics In Each Plotfile' option (Option Switch 31=0) and the required Plotfile Length is different to the built-in default value of 3275 mm.

0 Default for Plotfile Length of 3275 mm.

Value Where Value is set to the required Plotfile Length in whole mm's. Note. The maximum length is limited to 3350 mm.

0

Zero orValue

12

PLOTFILE LENGTH

SwitchPosition

4 3

Related Option Switches.

ALIAS- 1 -

etails


D

SbSb

ISOGENSwitch Title Option Switch No.


Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

The primary purpose of this Option Switch is to control the generation ofthe Cut Piece List and corresponding Cut Piece Identifiers (Numbers orLetters) at appropriate positions along the Plotted Pipeline.An option to have Cut Piece Identifiers (Numbers or Letters) starting a 1or ‘A’ on each isometric as opposed to each pipeline is also controlled here.There are two types of Cut Piece List - Old style with limited informationand New style with full information.Finally, for Imperial Units Users- there is an Option to have the CutLengths listed on the New Style Cut piece List in Decimal Inches format.This being in addition to the regular value in the LENGTH column.

This Option Switch is in five parts.SWITCH POSITION 1 - Cut Piece Numbering and Cut Piece List on/off

control.0 Default for No Cut Piece List or Cut Piece Identification

Numbers/Letters.1 Cut Piece List and Cut Piece Identifiers generated.2 Cut Piece Identifiers starting at 1 (one) or A on each

isometric drawing.SWITCH POSITION 2 - Cut Piece List Style.0 Default for Old Style Cut Piece List.1 For New Style Cut Piece List.

(Continued overpage)

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 2

2

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY.DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED BOM.

5.9.3 JUN 90

CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE

7.0 OCT 93

02

SwitchPosition

13

0,1 or 2

4

Zero or one

Blank,1 or 2

5

ISSUE 3


678

0 to 8Blank or 1

2. Cut piece numbering/list type

ALIAS- 2 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


ExtendedUse

Description

OPT - 2

2 Cont.

(Continued from previous page)

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Alphabetic Cut Piece Identifiers.

0 Default for Numeric Cut Piece Identifiers.1 For Alphabetic Cut Piece Identifiers.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Supplementary output of Cut Length in Decimal Inches.

0 Default for standard Cut Lengths only.1 For supplementary output of Cut Lengths in Decimal Inches

format in the REMARKS column of the New Style Cut PieceList. (This option only applies to users who use ImperialUnits).

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Calculation of Branch Cut Length to centre of main pipeline.

0 Default for calculation to actual Branch connection point.E.g. normal set-on tee.

1 Calculation to the centre line of the main pipeline in ALLsituations.

2 Use co-ordinate position.


Switch Settings

7.4 DEC 957.2 APR 95

7.6.2 MAY 96

7.14.4 JUL 98

ISSUE 3


8.7.0 APR 01

Cut Piece Numbers can now be output on the isometric in a variety ofalternative enclosure types which are controlled by Switch position 7 and 8

ALIAS- 3 -

ALIAS

Switches by numberSwitches by name

- 4 -

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Pipe Bending File

0 Pipe fabrication information including details of each cutpiece, listing the length, diameter, end preparation, materialpart number, and other related details to assist manufacturing. In addition bending information giving distances to/between bends, angle and radius details are alsooutput.

1 Pipe fabrication information as described above but alsoincluding details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipeand the cutting of holes (for tees, olets, crosses, etc).

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Cut Piece Enclosure Types0 Pointed brackets1 Diamond ended box2 Round ended box3 Triangular enclosure4 Diamond enclosure5 Square ended box6 Circular enclosure7 Elliptical enclosure8 Hexagonal ended box

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Single / Double line enclosure

0 Standard single line enclosure1 Double line enclosure (Circular/Elliptical enclosures only)



Options


ExtendedUse

OPT - 2

2 Cont.


Switch Settings

8.7.2 JUN 01

ISSUE 3


DEV. NO. 88B - PIPE BENDING FILE EXTENSION.


8.10.5 NOV 02

8.11.0 APR 03

etails


D

SbSb

3. Drawing trim marksISOGEN



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 3

3

1.0 APR 83NONE

EitherSetting

This Option Switch controls the generation of Trim Marks for the plotted isometric drawing.These Trim Marks indicate the extremities of the nominated drawing size (as set by either Option Switch 14 or Option Switches 15 and 16) and are used as guides when trimming the plots produced on a continuous paper type plotter.

0 Default for No Trim Marks to be generated.

1 Plotted Trim Marks to be generated to indicate the extremities ofeach plotted isometric.

0

1

DRAWING TRIM MARKS

SwitchPosition


ALIAS- 5 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 4

4

1.0 APR 83NONE

This Option Switch is used to control the physical size of the Characters that are used for Dimensions, Co-ordinates and Message Text, etc. on the 'picture section' of the isometric drawing.Note. Title Block Text which is always output using Large Characters (2.8mm) and Material List Text which is controlled either by Option Switch No. 27 or the Material List Definition File will not be affected by the setting of this Switch.

SWITCH POSITION 1 & 2 Character Height

0 Default for Medium size characters - 2.4mm high.1 For Small size characters - 2.1mm high.2 For Large size characters - 2.8mm high.3 For Extra Large size characters - 3.5mm high.4 For Extra Large size characters - 4.2mm high.5 For Extra Large size characters - 4.9mm high.10 to 99 Character Height in 1/10mms

DRAWING TEXT SIZE

7.4 DEC 95

ISSUE 2


8.6.0 APR 01

0

1234567

0 or Value

SwitchPosition

89

FutureBlank or Value Spare

4. Drawing text size

ALIAS- 6 -

ALIAS


- 7 -



Options

Related Program Development Specs. Version DateExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 4

4 cont.

NONE

DRAWING TEXT SIZE

ISSUE 2


Controls text attributes allowing height, width, thickness and font to beuser controlled.Text height can be set in 10th mm increments in a range between 1.0mm and 9.9mm.Text width can be set on 10th mm to allow the height/width ratio to bevaried.Text thickness can be set.Text font can be varied, this is achieved by selecting a font from the FontInformation File (Fontstd.fif).

OPTION SWITCH 3 & 4 Character Width

10 to 99 Character width in mms (To be included in the future)

OPTION SWITCH 5 Character Thickness (Weight)

1 to 9 Character thickness in mms (To be included in the future)

OPTION SWITCH 6 (SPARE)

OPTION SWITCH 7, 8 and 9

Number corresponding to entry in appropriate Font Information File. Set to Zero or Blank will use default font.

etails


D

SbSb

5. Co-ordinates - Connection/connectivityISOGEN



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 5

5

5.4 APR 87DEV. NO. 29 - END CO-ORDS. SUPPRESSION.DEV. NO. 47 - GHOST GAP FACILITY.

This facility is for the selective suppression from the Isometric of the Co-ordinate information that is associated with each of the seven Pipeline End Connection / Termination Identifiers in -30 to -36 type records, and at any Break In Point (B.I.P.) identifier position in -47 type records.Each type is controlled by a separate position in the Option Switch as indicated in the layout below.

5.9 MAR 90

12345678-30Rec

-31Rec

-32Rec

-33Rec

-47Rec

-36Rec

-35Rec

-34Rec

The Co-ordinate type identifiers are :- IDFPURPOSE ISO TEXT RECORD NO.

Continuation on another pipeline CONT. ON -30 Connected to Equipment Nozzle Etc. CONN. TO -31 Identify any Open End of pipework User Defined Text -32 Identify any Closed End of pipework User Defined Text -33 Identify a Vent position VENT -34 Identify a Drain position DRAIN -35 Identify any miscellaneous position User Defined Text -36 Identify a Break-In Point - -47Each Option Switch position should be set to :-0 For ISO TEXT (See above) and associated Co-ordinates to be

shown on the isometric. 1 For ISO TEXT (See above) with No Co-ordinates to be shown

on the isometric. Where appropriate, leading zeros may be omitted to give blank positions.

SwitchPosition

CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/CONNECTIVITY


ALIAS- 8 -

etails


D

SbSb

6. Date output



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 6

6

1.0 APR 83VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTESDEV. NO. 74B - FOUR DIGIT YEAR

AllSettings

This Option Switch is used to select the Date format that is to be output on the isometric drawing and printed listings in 2/4 digit year format.The actual Date that is output is taken automatically from either the Pipeline Data File that has been created by the host 3D Design System, or the Computer System Date at run time.As shown below, there are three format options plus an Option Switch setting to suppress any Date Output, even though a Date may exist in the IDF.

0 Default British format - e.g. 14 APR 921 For European format - e.g. 14/04/922 For American format - e.g. 04/14/923 For no plotted Date to be output.10 System Date in British format.11 System Date in European format.12 System Date in American format.

0

DATE OUTPUT

SwitchPosition

1

7.1 JUN 94

2

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Date Output/Format.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - 2/4 Digit Year Output.0 or Blank Output 2 digit year format.

1 Output 4 digit year format (e.g. 14/04/1992).

0, blankor 1

3

7.16.0 MAY 99


ALIAS- 9 -

etails


D

SbSb

7. Pipeline splitting - User control



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Identifies the method to be used when Splitting Pipelines into multiple isometric drawings. Two methods are available :-i) Automatic Splitting. The automatic Split routine calculates the volume of Pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily displayed on the selected DRAWING SIZE, and generates the required number of isometrics to contain the complete Pipeline.ii) A fixed number of drawings. With this method the User directly dictates how many isometric drawings are to be produced for a Pipeline.Notes. a) The setting in Position 1 of this Switch will be ignored if Manual Pipeline Split Points are present in the Pipeline Data file. b) Method ii) should only be used in special cases for single Pipeline runs, since any Option Switch setting applies to all the Pipelines in a run.

An added Option permits any Drawing Split Points input in the 3D model by the User and present in the Piping Data file to be ignored.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 7

7

1.0 APR 83NONE

0

Zero orValue

2

This Option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Various controls.0 Default for automatic Split Control. Value Where value is equal to the number of drawings required.


SwitchPosition

1

PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL


3

Blank or one

7.7 AUG 9638

ALIAS- 10 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 7

PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL


7 Cont.


SWITCH POSITION 3 - Ignore Drawing Split Points.

1 To have User Defined Drawing Split Points present in the Piping Data file ignored.

38

ALIAS- 11 -

etails


D

SbSb

8. Dimension line standout



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

This is a basic Option Switch for controlling Dimension Line Standout Distances for :-a) String & Composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle

layer of multi-layer dimensions.b) Dimensioned Messages, Support Dimensions and Reference dimensions on

the inner layer, but only when a Standout Distance in Option Switch 40 is not set.

c) Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when a Standout Distance in Option Switch 118 is not set.

Note. Values set to < = 11 mm. will be ignored by the program and substituted by the appropriate Standard Dimension Line Standout distance.


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 8

8

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.V8.8.0 - RELEASE NOTES

0

0 or Value

2

6.0 MAR 91

0 Default for standard Dimension Line Standouts (see below). Value Where value equals the required Standout distance for String &

Composite dimensions on the middle layer - in whole mm's .

Standard Dimension Line Standout distances are :-For Small size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 1)a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12 mmb) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 6 mmc) Overall Dimension Standout = 18 mm

(Continued over page)

1

DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT


SwitchPosition

7.4 DEC 95

ISSUE 2

3

0 or 1

4

4 118

ALIAS- 12 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

ExtendedUse

Description

OPT - 8

8 Cont.

(Continued from previous page) When the Option Switch value is set > 11 mm. - that value is used by the program to set the Dimension Line Standout distance for String & Composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner dimension layer for Dimensioned Messages, Support Dimensions and Reference Dimensions will then be set to 0.5 X this distance, while the outer layer Overall Dimensions will be set to 1.5 X .

(Standard Dimension Line Standout distances - continued from the previous page) For Medium size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 0)a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 14 mmb) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 7 mmc) Overall Dimension Standout = 21 mm

For Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 2)a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 16 mmb) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 8 mmc) Overall Dimension Standout = 24 mm

For Extra Large size Drawing Text (Option Switch 4 = 3)a) String / Composite Dimension Standout = 18 mmb) Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 9 mmc) Overall Dimension Standout = 27 mm



DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

ISSUE 2

8.6.0 APR 01

JUL 018.8.04 118

ALIAS- 13 -

ALIAS


- 14 -



Options

Version DateExtendedUse

OPT - 8

8 Cont.DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

ISSUE 2

Switch Settings

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Isometric Text

0 Standard text1 Isometric text

SWITCH POSITION 4 Vertical Dimension Standout

0 Normal selection criteria used to determine directional standout.

1 Vertical dimension standout wherever possible.

Dimension text and messages placed along a section of pipe in isometric projection(oblique angle \ slanted text).

This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated via the PODinterface.

Text oblique angle will be adjusted to be parallel to the dimension standoutdirection.

ISOGEN will attempt to set a vertical dimension standout for horizontal sections ofpipeline wherever practical.

Description (Continued from previous page)

etails


D

SbSb



Options


FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse

This Option Switch is in eight parts.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

9

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 19 - IMPROVED DIMENSIONING. DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE.DEV.NO. 83F - DIMENSIONING ENHANCEMENTS

Controls basic Dimensioning requirements on the isometric :-i) Dimension Type - String/Composite, Support/Comment, ReferenceLocation and Full String.ii) Component Dimensions to include or exclude Gaskets.iii) ‘USA’ style dimensions (positioned on top of the Dimension Line).iv) Additional allowances for pipe dimensions.v) Double dimensioning - imperial or metricvi) Dimensioning Multi-way Valves and Instruments.

or one

0

23SwitchPosition

AllSettings

Blank or

7.0 OCT 93

DIMENSION FORM

5.0 OCT 86Related Option Switches.

14567

8.5.4 DEC 00

8.6.0 FEB 018.7.0 APR 01

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Various Controls

0 Default setting which provides basic String Dimensions, Support / Message Dimensions, and Reference Dimensions.

1 For an isometric with String Dimensions and Support/Message location Dimensions suppressed. That is,only Reference Dimensions will be plotted.

2 For the output of Support/Message and Reference LocationDimensions only.

3 Same as value 0 except Composite Dimensions are outputinstead of String.

4 Same as value 0 except Full String Dimensions are outputinstead of Ordinary String Dimensions. That is, all components are individually dimensioned.

89

9. Dimension form

40 118 119

ALIAS- 15 -

etails


D

SbSb



OptionsSwitch Title

9 Cont.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Dimensioning of Gaskets.

0 For component dimensions not to include Gaskets.1 For component dimensions to include Gaskets.2 For separate dimensioning of Gaskets.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - USA Style Dimensions.

Blank Default for regular Dimensioning style.(i.e. Inserted into Dimension line).

1 For USA Dimensioning style.(i.e. Positioned on top of Dimension line).

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Dimensions at 90 degrees

0 Dimensions turned 90 degrees rather than being arrowedout.

1 (Note. 0 and 1 at Beta test stage Feb 2001.)

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Additional allowances shown with dimension output

0 For normal component dimensions.1 For dimensions to show additional allowances.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Bend Dimensioning

0 Combined pipe and bend dimensions.1 Separate pipe and bend dimensions.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double dimensioning - Imperial and Metric.

0 For single dimensioning.1 For double dimensioning.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Dimensioning of Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valves and Instruments

0 Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valve and Instruments dimensionedusing message.

1 Angle / 3 Way / 4 Way Valve and Instruments dimensionednormally.

DIMENSION FORM

Switch Settings (Continued from previous page)

ALIAS- 16 -

ALIAS


- 17 -



OptionsSwitch Title

9 Cont.

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Jacket Dimension Control

0 Full Jacket Dimensioning1 Jacket Dimensioning suppressed.

DIMENSION FORM

Switch Settings (Continued from previous page)

ExtendedUse

Related Program Development Specs.

DEV. NO. 89D - JACKET PIPING SYSTEMS.

etails


D

SbSb

10. Drawing margin - LeftISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 10

10

Controls the Left Hand side Drawing Margin.The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

DRAWING MARGIN -LEFT


3 1

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Left.

0 Default for 5mm, Left Hand Margin.Value Where value is the Left Hand Margin setting in whole mm’s.

11 12 13

ALIAS- 18 -

etails


D

SbSb

11. Drawing margin - RightISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 11

11

1.0 APR 83NONE

DRAWING MARGIN - RIGHT

Controls the Right Hand side Drawing Margin.The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.


0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

3 1

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Right.

0 Default for 5mm, Right Hand Margin.Value Where value is the Right Hand Margin setting in whole mm’s.

10 12 13

ALIAS- 19 -

etails


D

SbSb

12. Drawing margin - TopISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 12

12

1.0 APR 83NONE

DRAWING MARGIN -TOP

Controls the Drawing Margin at the Top of the drawing.The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

3 1


SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Top.

0 Default for 5mm, Top Margin.Value Where value is the Top Margin setting in whole mm’s.

10 11 13

ALIAS- 20 -

etails


D

SbSb

13. Drawing margin - BottomISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 13

13

1.0 APR 83NONE

DRAWING MARGIN - BOTTOM

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

3 1


Controls the Drawing Margin at the Bottom of the drawing.The Drawing Margin is the distance between the outer edge of the Drawing Sheet and the outer line of the Drawing Frame that is being used.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Drawing Margin - Bottom.

0 Default for 5mm, Bottom Margin.Value Where value is the Bottom Margin setting in whole mm’s.

10 11 12

ALIAS- 21 -

etails


D

SbSb

14. Drawing size - Standard postscript plotter sizeISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 14

14Controls Drawing Size when a standard one conforming to the European Metric 'A' series or an Inch based American ANSI paper sizes 'A' to 'E' is required. A secondary function controlled by this Option Switch is the setting of the Postscript output device size for both standard and non-standard Drawing Sizes. Note. Non-standard Drawing Sizes are controlled by Option Switches 15 &

16 which if set overrides any setting in Option Switch 14.

1.0 APR 83VERSION 6.0 - RELEASE NOTES.

0

Zero orValue


SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Drawing Sheet Size.

0 Default for European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm).1 For European A1 paper size (594 x 841 mm).2 For European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm).3 For European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm).4 For European A4 paper size (210 x 297 mm).10 For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm).

5 For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34").6 For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22").7 For ANSI 'B' paper size (11" x 17").8 For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11").9 For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").


2

6.0 MAR 91

DRAWING SIZE - STANDARD POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE

34 SwitchPosition

1

Blank orValue


ALIAS- 22 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - PostScript Plotter size.

0 or blank For Default European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm).

1 For European A1 paper size (594 x 841 mm).2 For European A2 paper size (420 x 594 mm).3 For European A3 paper size (297 x 420 mm).4 For European A4 paper size (210 x 297 mm).10 For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm).

5 For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34").6 For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22").7 For ANSI 'B' paper size (11" x 17").8 For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11").9 For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 14

14 Cont.DRAWING SIZE -STANDARDPOSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE


ALIAS- 23 -

etails


D

SbSb

15. Drawing size - HeightISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 15

15

1.0 APR 83NONE

Defines isometric Drawing Height for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do Not conform to either the European 'A' series, or the Inch based American ANSI sizes.Notes.1) Where the plotted output is to a PostScript output device, the device size must be set in Option Switch 14 (unless European A3 size is being used).2) Standard drawing sizes are controlled by Option Switch 14.

0

Zero orValue

2 1 SwitchPosition

DRAWING SIZE -HEIGHT


4 3

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2, 3 & 4 - Drawing Size - Height.

0 Default for No non-standard Drawing Height.Value Where value is the overall Drawing Height in whole mm’s.

(This Option Switch MUST be used in conjunction with Option Switch 16- DRAWING SIZE - WIDTH).

1614

ALIAS- 24 -

etails


D

SbSb

16. Drawing size - WidthISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 16

16

1.0 APR 83NONE

Defines isometric Drawing Width for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do Not conform to either the European 'A' series, or the Inch based American ANSI sizes.Notes.1) Where the plotted output is to a PostScript output device, the device size must be set in Option Switch 14 (unless European A3 size is being used).2) Standard drawing sizes are controlled by Option Switch 14.

0

Zero orValue

234 1 SwitchPosition

DRAWING SIZE -WIDTH


SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2, 3 & 4 - Drawing Size - Width.

0 Default for No non-standard Drawing Width.Value Where value is the overall Drawing Width in whole mm’s.

(This Option Switch MUST be used in conjunction with Option Switch 15- DRAWING SIZE - HEIGHT).

1514

ALIAS- 25 -

etails


D

SbSb

17. Flow arrows - Components



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

Date

OPT - 17

17This Option Switch controls the use of Flow Arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components. Their purpose is to show the Pipeline's Fluid or Gas Flow direction.Note. A different type of User positioned Flow Arrow which is plotted directly on the pipe may also be used, either as well as, or instead of the component Flow Arrow. For details of this alternative type, see Option Switch 112.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0

EitherSetting

1

0 Default to obtain Flow Arrows plotted alongside certain types of in-line components.

1 To suppress the plotting of component Flow Arrows.

SwitchPosition

FLOW ARROWS -COMPONENTS


ALIAS- 26 -

etails


D

SbSb

18. Drawing frame - Program standardISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 18

18Controls whether or not the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame is plotted.It is likely that Users who either plot their own design of Backing Frame or plot to Frames on pre-printed forms, will wish to suppress the plotting of the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default to obtain the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame.

1 To suppress the plotting of the ISOGEN Drawing Frame.

0

EitherSetting

SwitchPosition

DRAWING FRAME - PROGRAM STANDARD

1


ALIAS- 27 -

etails


D

SbSb

19. Sloping pipeline indication method

20



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 19

19This Option Switch controls how sections of Falling Pipelines (that is downward slopes) are to be indicated on the isometric.The switch determines the method of how the Fall value is to be indicated numerically on the isometric from one of the options shown below.A further option is to suppress Fall type slope indication.

1.0 APR 83NONE

Default for Falls shown as an Angle. e.g. FALL 1.5°.0

1 For Falls shown as a Ratio. e.g. FALL 1:38.

2 For Falls shown as a Percentage. e.g. FALL 2.6%.

3 For Falls shown as a Gradient. e.g. FALL 1.6 GRAD.

4 For Falls shown as an Imperial Incline. e.g. 5/16" PER FOOT.

5 For Falls shown as a Metric Incline. e.g. FALL 26 MM PER M.

6 To suppress Falling Line indication.

0

AllSettings

SwitchPosition

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD


1


2

Blank, 1,2 or 3

8.11.0 APR 03

Switch Position 1 - Fall depiction

ALIAS- 28 -

ALIAS


- 29 -



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 19

19 Cont.

Switch 19 Position 2, now gives the user greater control over the accuracyof sloping pipeline indication.

(The settings in Position 2 are governed by how the fall is to be indicatedonce the data has been entered in Position 1. )

1.0 APR 83NONE




Switch Position 2 - Accuracy of sloping pipeline indication.

Fall shown as an Angle

0 Angle output to nearest 10th degree1 Angle output to nearest degree2 Angle output to nearest 100th degree3 Angle output to nearest degree and minutes

Fall shown as an Ratio

0 Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:301 Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:1002 Ratio output to nearest 1

Fall shown as an Percentage

0 Percentage output to nearest whole value1 Percentage output to nearest 1 decimal place2 Percentage output to nearest 2 decimal places


8.11.0 APR 03

ALIAS


- 30 -



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Switch Settings

OPT - 19

19 Cont.

1.0 APR 83NONE




Switch Position 2 - Accuracy of sloping pipeline indication contd.

Fall shown as an Gradient

0 Gradient output to nearest 10th grad1 Gradient output to nearest grad2 Gradient output to nearest 100th grad

Fall shown as an Imperial Incline (only when dimensions in decimal inches)

0 Incline output to nearest 16th of an inch per foot1 Incline output to nearest 100th of an inch per foot

Fall shown as an Metric Incline

0 Incline output to nearest 5mm’s per metre1 Incline output to nearest mm per metre2 Incline to nearest 10mm’s per metre

8.11.0 APR 03

etails


D

SbSb

20. Sloping pipeline indication limitISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 20

20

This switch controls the cut-off value to be used when determining what steepness of Slope should be treated as a Fall, and what should not. Note. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value will be shown with a 2D or 3D Box or Triangle skew indication as appropriate.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for 5° angle cut-off or it's equivalent depending upon the type of indication selected in Option Switch 19.

Value Where Value is set to a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected in Option Switch 19.

e.g. For 5 Degrees cut off enter 5 or 0For 1:11 Ratio cut-off enter 11For 9 Percent cut-off enter 9For 5 Grads. cut-off enter 5For 1" Per Foot cut-off enter 1For 88 mm. per Metre cut-off enter 88

Note. This Option Switch should always be set to 0 when Sloping Pipeline Indication has been suppressed by setting Option Switch 19 to 6.

SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION LIMIT

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition


1

19

ALIAS- 31 -

etails


D

SbSb

21. Isometric typeISOGEN



Version DateFirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 21

21

Controls the required Isometric Type. There are many variations, as defined below.The default option provides a Combined isometric containing a combination of Fabrication, Erection and Offshore information as appropriate.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 63A - FLAT SPOOLS FACILITY.DEV. NO. 74A - DISCONNECTED PIPELINES


SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Isometric Type.

0 Default for a Combined isometric (see above).1 For an Erection / Offshore type isometric.2 For a Fabrication only isometric.4 For individual Flat Spool isometrics. (Maximum legs Flat).5 For individual Flat Spool isometrics. (Maximum legs Parallel).6 For individual Spool isometrics - 'As Built' orientation.7 For isometric Suppression - No isometric drawings generated.10 For a Combined Material List only, without Pipeline graphics.11 For an Erection Material List only, without Pipeline graphics.12 For a Fabrication Material List only, without Pipeline graphics.16 For Spool Material List only, without Spool graphics.


ISOMETRIC TYPE

7.1 JUN 94

ISSUE 2

7.4.2 JAN 96

0

23SwitchPosition

AllSettings

1

AllSettings


7.16.0 MAY 9955

ALIAS- 32 -

etails


D

SbSb

Blank Generate normal isometric.1 Generate a Test Isometric with all dimensions and Material

List quantities output as X’s. Does not decrement theHardware Lock count.

8 Increase tolerance to join disconnected components - setto 8mm. See note below.

9 Produce separate drawings for disconnected pipeline whenincreased tolerance used and switch 55, digit 3 set to 0.See note below.

Notes Value 8 and 9 are set internally and will not require the userto take any action.

Switch Position 3 = 8 When a ‘Minor’ break occurs at the By-passclosure point then IDFGEN will set position 3 toa value of 8 so that ISOGEN will still recognisethe By-pass situation that has been created.

Switch Position 3 = 9 A value of 9 will be set by IDFGEN in position3 when certain conditions of Switch 55 are met.ISOGEN will act upon this information tooutput the ‘Disconnected Pipeline’ message asand when required.



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 21

21 Cont.ISOMETRIC TYPE

ISSUE 2

(Continued from previous page)SWITCH POSITION 3 - Test Isometric.


ALIAS- 33 -

etails


D

SbSb

22. Cut piece add-on allowanceISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Switch Layout

This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - FFW/Loose Flange Allowance, On-shore.0 Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance.Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175.

SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 - FFW/Loose Flange Allowance, Off-shore.0 or blank Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance.Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175.

SWITCH POSITIONS 7, 8 & 9 - Shop Test Weld Allowance.Blank Default to obtain 0 mm. allowance.Value Where Value is an alternative allowance in whole mm's. e.g. 175.

This is applied only to 'SHOP TEST' Welds.

Description

OPT - 22

22This switch controls the amount of extra Pipe that is added for the following circumstances :-1) At Loose Flange and Field Fit Weld (FFW) positions. Extra Pipe is added both to Cut Pipe Length dimensions and to Pipe quantities on the Material List. There are separate controls for On-shore and Off-shore values.2) For Shop Test purposes where certain Welds are cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES UPGRADE.DEV. NO. 63 - FLAT SPOOL FACILITY.

CUT PIECE ADD-ON ALLOWANCES

7.0 OCT 93

Switch Settings

0

SwitchPosition

123456

Zero orValue

Zero, blank orValue

789

Blank orValue

7.1 FEB 94

ALIAS- 34 -

etails


D

SbSb

23. Material list - Controls and File typeISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in five parts.SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List On/Off.0 Default to have the Material List plotted integrally with the

isometric drawing. 1 To suppress the Plotted Material List.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Special Type Material Lists.0 Default for no Special Type Material List.1 Special Type Material List - every item is given a separate

entry except Gaskets & Bolts which are accumulated, Pulled Bends get 'U' pre-fixes, Welds have W or B pre-fixes.

2 No Special Type Material List, but use an alpha system of Material List pointers, A, B, C etc. instead of the default numeric system.


Controls the following integral Material List functions on the isometric.i) Material List On/Off ii) Special Type of List.iii) Material List Style.iv) Material Control File Type. v) Continuous or Sectionalised type of Material List.Users who obtain the Material List by other means, for example by printing it, or who do not require a Material List at all, may suppress it.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 23

23

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST.

7.0 OCT 93

SwitchPosition 0

All Settings

12345


MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLSMATERIAL LIST - FILE TYPE

7.4 DEC 95

ISSUE 2

2524 2926 27 28 7430 65

ALIAS- 35 -

etails


D

SbSb



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITION 3 - Material List Style.0 or 1 Default for Style 1 Material List. 2 For Style 2 Material List.3 For Style 3 Material List.4 For Style 4 Material List.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Type of Material Control File.0 Default for Standard Material Control File. 1 For User Defined Material Control File.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Style 2 Material List Layout pattern. (Also works with Special Type Material List options - OS23 Pos 2 = 1).

Blank Default for the standard Sectionalised type with Group Headings & Component sub-Group Headings.

1 For Continuous style listing without headings & Sub-headings. This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical Groups, e.g. PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, etc.

2 Same as value 1 except there are no dividing lines.

Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 23

23 Cont.

Switch Settings

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLSMATERIAL LIST - FILE TYPE

ISSUE 2

7.6 MAY 96Related Option Switches.

2524 2926 27 28 7430 65

ALIAS- 36 -

etails


D

SbSb



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 24

24This Option Switch controls two aspects of the Material List.

i) Whether it is produced on a per Drawing or per Pipeline basis. (Thisdifference only comes into effect when a Pipeline is split onto two or moredrawings).ii) Linear Quantity output style.

1.0 APR 83


SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List per Drawing or per Pipeline.

0 Default for Material List per isometric drawing.1 For Material List per Pipeline.2 Spool isometric Material Part Numbers to match Full

isometric Part Numbers when using Material List per Drawing facility.

3 Spool isometric Material Part Numbers to match Full isometric Part Numbers when using Material List per Pipeline facility.

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING MATERIAL LIST - PIPE LENGTH UNITS

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

7.0 OCT 93

Blank orValue

DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST.


1

7.6.2 MAY 96

ISSUE 2

O.S. 23 O.S. 24 0.S. 25 0.S. 26 0.S. 27 O.S. 28 O.S. 29 O.S. 30

24. Material list - Pipeline/drawing and Pipeline length units

ALIAS- 33 -

ALIAS


- 34 -



Switch Settings

OPT - 24

24 cont

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Linear Quantity Output Style.

Blank Default for pipe length to be output in the form -n.n M or n.n Feet. E.g. 10.4 M or 10.4’.

1 For pipe length to be output in the form -n MM or n Feet n Inches. E.g. 1040 MM or 10’ 5 “.

2 For pipe length to be output in the form -n.nnn M or n.nnn Feet. E.g. 1.045 M or 10.375’.

3 For pipe length output to match form specified in O.S. 41.The selected length style is applied on the Material List forPipe material entries and miscellaneous components, and onthe CL length summary. (Metric or Imperial units output isgoverned by O.S. 41).

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING MATERIAL LIST - PIPE LENGTH UNITS

ISSUE 2

ExtendedUse

8.10.5 NOV 02Related Option Switches.

etails


D

SbSb

25. Material list and Title block- positionISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 25

25This Option Switch controls two aspects of the Material List.i) Whether the Material List is printed on the Left Hand or Right Hand

side of the isometric.ii) The position of the Title Block.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST.


SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material List position.0 Default for Material List printed on the Left Hand side.

1 For Material List printed on the Right Hand side.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Title Block position.Blank For Title Block in default position. (Bottom Right Hand

corner of pipeline drawing area).1 For Title Block at bottom of Material List.2 For Title Block to be suppressed.

7.0 OCT 93

Zero orValue

Blank orValue

0

12 SwitchPosition

MATERIAL LIST - POSITIONTITLE BLOCK - POSITION


2423 2926 27 28 30

ALIAS- 35 -

etails


D

SbSb

26. Material list - DescriptionsISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in three parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Item Descriptions On / Off control.0 Default to have Item Descriptions printed.1 To suppress Item Descriptions.

single line Material List entries.

Not have Blank Lines inserted following single line entries. This

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Control of the insertion of Blank Lines following

0 or blank Default to have Blank Lines inserted.1

provides the possibility of the Material List being shorter.

This Option Switch controls whether or not Item Descriptions are printed on the Material List and in the Bulk Materials file.Note. When Item Descriptions are suppressed, the Material List becomes correspondingly narrower.Also controlled is the option of whether or not to have a Blank Line printed after single line Material List entries.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 26

26

1.0 APR 83VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTES.

EitherSetting

0

2 SwitchPosition

1

7.1 JUN 94

MATERIAL LIST - DESCRIPTIONS


3

7.14.4 JUL 98

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Output of Descriptions in Bulk Material file.Blank Default for no Descriptions.1 No repeat Descriptions to be output.

All Descriptions to be output.2

ISSUE 3

2523 2924 27 28 30

ALIAS- 36 -

etails


D

SbSb

27. Material list - Text size



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 27

27This Option Switch controls the plotted Material List Text Size. A range of sizes are available, as listed below.

1.0 APR 83NONE

MATERIAL LIST - TEXT SIZE

Related Option Switches. 7.4 DEC 95

ISSUE 2

SWITCH POSITION 1 & 2 Character Height

0 Default for Medium size characters - 2.4mm high.1 For Small size characters - 2.1mm high.2 For Large size characters - 2.8mm high.3 For Extra Large size characters - 3.5mm high.4 For Extra Large size characters - 4.2mm high.5 For Extra Large size characters - 4.9mm high.10 to 99 Character Height in 1/10mms

0

1234567

All Settings

SwitchPosition

89

2523 2924 26 28 30

ALIAS- 37 -

etails


D

SbSb

28. Material list - Item code lengthISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 28

28This Option Switch informs ISOGEN of how many characters should be used for the Material List Item Code.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for 8 characters in the Item Code.

Value Where Value is an alternative number of characters. e.g. 12.

Notes.a) The maximum number of permissible Item Code characters is 29.b) A value of 0 gives 8 characters, it does Not cause the suppression of the

Item Code field on the Style 1 Material List.c) Changes in this field causes the Material List to be correspondingly wider

or narrower.

0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

MATERIAL LIST - ITEM CODE LENGTH


1

2523 2924 26 27 30

ALIAS- 38 -

etails


D

SbSb

29. Material list - Line spacingISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 29

29This Option Switch controls the Line Spacing distance on a plotted Material List.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 or 100 Default corresponding to a Line Spacing value of 100.

Value Where Value is an alternative number. Set to increase / decrease the Line Spacing distance in the ratio Value / 100.

e.g. A Value of 90 will reduce the Line Spacing while a Value of 110 will increase it.

0

MATERIAL LIST - LINE SPACING

Zero orValue

23 SwitchPosition

1


2523 2824 26 27 30

ALIAS- 39 -

etails


D

SbSb

30. Material list - Continuation method



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 30

30Controls how a Material List Overflow situation is handled and how any Overflow drawing is to be identified.A secondary option offers control over the Drawing (Sheet) identification method to be used for single isometric pipelines.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 48 - REPEATABILITY - PHASE 1.

0 Default to give automatic overflow onto a second Material Listplotted alongside the first. (This creates a wider non-standard drawing size).

1 Gives a second 'Dummy' isometric containing the Overflow Material List but no pipeline graphics. This isometric will be allocated the next Drawing (Sheet) identifier in the sequence.

2 Gives a second 'Dummy' isometric containing the Overflow Material List but no pipeline graphics. The isometric will be allocated the same Drawing (Sheet) identifier as the previous (Master) isometric but supplemented with a 'A' suffix letter. Any further overflow drawings for the same Master isometric will be suffixed 'B' 'C' etc.


0

AllSettings

2 1 SwitchPosition

MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD

5.9 MAR 90Related Option Switches.

2523 2824 26 27 29

ALIAS- 40 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 30

30 Contd.

(Contd. from previous page)

10 Gives the same as value 0 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added toany single sheet isometrics for identification.

11 Gives the same as value 1 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added to any single sheet isometrics for identification.

12 Gives the same as value 2 except that DRG 1 OF 1 is added toany single sheet isometrics for identification.

MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD


2523 2824 26 27 29

ALIAS- 41 -

etails


D

SbSb

31. Drawing output - File/screen



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 31

31Controls how and where any isometric drawing are to be output.

Controls whether or not plot files previously created can be overwritten iftheir names match those currently being created.

1.0 APR 83NONE

DRAWING OUTPUT - FILE / SCREEN

0

0 or value

1SwitchPosition

Related Option Switches. 8.7.0 APR 01

SWITCH POSITION 1

0 Default for isometric drawings generated during a run to beoutput to either a single plot file or a series of plot files depending upon the PLOTFILE LENGTH value set in O.S. 1.

1 For an individual plot file to be generated for each isometricdrawing.

2 For output of the generated isometric drawing(s) to the workstation screen. The Terminal Type being used should beset in O.S. 69.

3 For output of multiple isometric drawings on separate sheets.Valid only for SmartSketch IGR & SmartPlant Shape2Dformats.

SWITCH POSITION 2

0 Allocate next available plot file, generate name using selectedsequence method.

1 Allocate Plotfile name using selected sequence method afterdeleting previously generated files.

2

Blank or 1

O.S. 1 O.S. 36 O.S. 37 O.S. 69 O.S. 71 8.10.0 MAY 02

ALIAS- 42 -

etails


D

SbSb

32. Drawing output - scalingISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 32

32This Option Switch permits the increase or decrease of the final plotted isometric size and thus change it from that defined by Option Switches 14, or 15 & 16.

1.0 APR 83VERSION 6.0 RELEASE NOTES.

DRAWING OUTPUT - SCALING

0 or 100 For No Scaling change (100% of set size). This generates isometrics at the size set in either Option Switch 14, or a combination of Option Switches 15 & 16.

Value Where Value is set to increase or decrease the final isometric size in the ratio Value / 100. e.g. Value = 71 would generate a Reduced size drawing at 71% of the set size, (for example A2 reduced to A3). Value = 120 would generate an Increased size drawing at 120% of the set size.

0

Zero orValue

6.0 MAR 91

23 1 SwitchPosition


14 15 16

ALIAS- 43 -


SbSb

33. Revision/detailed marker



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 33

33This Option Switch is used by some 3D Design Systems to control the updating of their 'Pipe Detailed' and / or 'Pipe Revision' database attribute fields on the successful production of a pipeline isometric by ISOGEN.Note. This Option Switch has no effect on any output generated by the ISOGEN system.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default to Suppress the updating of both the Revision & Detailed indicators.

1 For both the Revision and Detailed fields to be updated.

2 For Revision only to be updated.

3 For Detailed only to be updated.

0

AllSettings

REVISION / DETAILED MARKER

1 SwitchPosition


ALIAS- 44 -

etails


D

SbSb

34. Drawing output - Picture scale



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 34

34Used to increase or decrease the Scale of the pipeline 'picture' part of the isometric only, while leaving all other parts (that is, Drawing Frame, Material List, Title Block and Line Summary areas) un-altered.By use of this Option Switch the whole of the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it may be re-scaled to make it larger or smaller.

1.0 APR 83NONE

DRAWING OUTPUT - PICTURE SCALE

0 or 100 Default to give the normal Picture Scaling. (100%).

Value Where Value is set to increase or decrease the Scaling effect in the ratio Value / 100.

0

Zero orValue

23 SwitchPosition

1


ALIAS- 45 -

etails


D

SbSb

35. Drawing - Reserved areas



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch may be used to create two Reserved 'No Go' areas across the bottom part of the isometric. One is across the bottom of the drawing region itself, while the other is across the bottom of the Material List. Once set, ISOGEN will not automatically plot any information in these areas. They are basically reserved areas on the Drawing Frame for the inclusion on the finished drawing of related Project / Pipeline information. The Frame Text Positioning facility may be used to add information that is included in the Pipeline input data file in these areas.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 35

35

1.0 APR 83

This Option Switch is in two parts.SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Reserved Area within the Drawing Region.0 Default for No Reserved Area.Value Where Value is equal to the depth of the required Reserved

Area along the bottom of the isometric, measured in whole mm.'s up from the outer line of the drawing frame.

SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 - Reserved Area at the bottom of the Material List.

Blank Default for No Reserved Area.Value Where Value is equal to the depth of the required Reserved

Area along the bottom of the Material List measured in whole mm.'s up from the outer line of the drawing frame.

DRAWING - RESERVED AREAS

0

SwitchPosition

123456

Zero orValue

Blank orValue

7.0 OCT 94

DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL LIST.


13

ALIAS- 46 -

etails


D

SbSb

36. Drawing output - Stacking valueISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 36

36This Option Switch controls the number of Drawing Stacking rows within a plot file containing multi-drawings.Depending upon the drawing size, orientation, and width of the plotter paper, Drawing Stacking may be one, two, three or more rows high.

1.0 APR 83NONE

Zero orValue

0 or 1 Default for 1 drawing high Stacking. All drawings will be plotted side-by-side within the plotfile.

Value Where Value is an alternative setting. e.g. 2 for 2 frame high Stacking, 3 for 3 frame high, etc.

Note. This Option Switch must be set to 0 or 1 when using the Output to graphics screen facility.

0

SwitchPosition

DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING VALUE


1

31 37

ALIAS- 47 -

etails


D

SbSb

37. Drawing output - Stacking orientation



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 37

37

This Option Switch controls the Orientation of the drawings within the plotfile.If required, to make the most economical use of plotter paper, Drawings may be set to run Along or Across the paper.(Along being defined as running the length of the roll of plotter paper).

1.0 APR 83NONE

EitherSetting

DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING ORIENTATION

0 Default for plotting Along the roll of paper .

1 For plotting Across the roll of paper .

01 Switch

Position


36

ALIAS- 48 -

etails


D

SbSb

38. Pipeline splitting - Automatic



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 38

38Controls Automatic Pipeline Splitting. The amount of piping information that can be accommodated on a single drawing is limited. Once the limit is exceeded, then pipeline splitting automatically occurs.By use of this Option Switch, users may either increase the information content on each drawing , or alternatively, reduce the content.

1.0 APR 83NONE

PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC

0

Zero orValue

23 1SwitchPosition


Allows the Pipeline Name to output with the continuation message.

4

Bank or 1

8.11.0 APR 03

Switch Position 1 to 3 - Drawing information content limit

0 or 100 Default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content. The limit is set within the program and varies for each size of drawing.

Value Where value is set to increase or decrease the drawing information content in the ratio Value / 100.

Switch Position 4 - Pipeline Name output

0 Standard Drawing Continuation Message

1 Drawing Continuation Message includes Pipeline Name

7

ALIAS- 49 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

This Option Switch is in 7 parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Basic control.

0 Default for Spool Identifiers to be switched On, using a numeric system.

1 Causes the output of Spool Identifiers to be suppressed.2 As for value 0 but use an alpha system of A, B, C etc.


Spool Identifiers permit the unique identification of each pipe Spool on theisometric drawing.There are several different formats available, as listed below.Note. The presence of a record in a Pipeline Dat file to denote a User definedSpool Identifier causes the value in Positions 1 & 2 of this Option Switch tobe totally ignored.An additional control allows various box enclosures for the Spool Identifier.Control whether Unions should be a spool split point.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 39

39

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY.VERSION 7.0 - RELEASE NOTES.VERSION 8.8.0 - RELEASE NOTESDEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES

ELLIPSES & DOUBLE CIRCLES

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

0

123SwitchPosition

AllSettings

Zeroor one

7.1 JUN 94

4



Options

Version Date

First UseRelated Program Development Specs.

7.4DEC 95

5

Zeroor one

ISSUE 3

AllSettings


Zeroor one

67

7.14.58.5.1 SEP 00

7.12JAN 98

8.8.0 JUL 01

ExtendedUse

8.10.0 MAY 02

89

AllSettings

AllSettings

39. Spool piece identifiers

ALIAS- 50 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


SWITCH POSITION 2 - Spool Identifier sequence.

0 For the current Spool Identifier sequence to continue ontoeach new drawing.

1 Causes Spool Identifiers to re-commence at 1 on each newdrawing.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Box enclosure style.

0 Default for Spool Identifiers to be enclosed in the standardsquare brackets or a Double box enclosure.

1 Enclosure to be a Diamond ended box.2 Enclosure to be a Round ended box.3 Enclosure to be a Triangle shaped box. *4 Enclosure to be a Diamond shaped box. *5 Enclosure to be a Square ended box.6 Enclosure to be circular.7 No enclosure.9 Elliptical Spool Number enclosure.

* Because these two enclosures cannot be elongated there is a limit on thenumber of characters that can be accommodated, depending uponcharacter size.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Spool Drawing Identifier (User).

0 Default for Pipeline reference to be prefixed to Spool ID.1 Output for Spool Drawing Identifier to be Pipeline Reference

- User Spool ID if any User Defined Spool ID’s are found inthe input pipeline data file.

Switch Settings

OPT - 39

39 Cont.SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

ISSUE 3

ALIAS- 51 -

ALIAS

Details


- 52 -



Options


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Spool Drawing Identifier (Automatic).

0 Spool Drawing Identifier to be Spool ID.1 Output for Spool Drawing Identifier to be Pipeline Reference

- Automatic Spool ID if no User defined Spool ID’s are foundin the input pipeline data file.

2 Spool Identifier generated from Pipeline File Name - Automatic Spool ID

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Spool Identifiers (Fabrication).

0 Do not allocate Spool Identifiers for lone fabrication components.

1 Allocate Spool Identifiers for lone fabrication components.2 User controlled Pipe Spools only - no automatically

generated spools.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Spool Break Points at Unions

0 A Fabrication union connecting fabrication components willcreate separate spools.

1 A Fabrication union connecting fabrication components will not create separate spools.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Single/Double line Circular Spool Number Enclosures

0 Single line Spool Number Enclosure.1 Double line Spool Number Enclosure (use with circular

enclosure to get double circles).

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Circular & Elliptical Spool Number Enclosure Size

0 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2characters.

1 to 8 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to valueset.

9 Spool Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

Switch Settings

OPT - 39

39 Cont.SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

ISSUE 3

ExtendedUse 8.11.0 APR 03

etails


D

SbSb

40. Pipe supportsISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch controls the following Pipe Support functions :-a) Support Dimension type - String or Overall dimensions. b) Whether or not Pipe Supports are shown on the isometric.c) Support Dimension Stand-Out position. The Support Dimension may

either be on the same side of the pipe as the normal pipe dimensions, or on the opposite side.

d) The Support Dimension Line Stand-Out distance.

This Option Switch is in four parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Pipe Support Dimension Type and Support

Suppression.0 Default for Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric and

dimensioned in String form.1 For Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric and dimensioned in

Overall form. 2 To Suppress Pipe Supports on the isometric and on the Material List.3 For Pipe Supports to be drawn on the isometric but to be

un-dimensioned.


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 40

40

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 53 ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.

6.0 MAR 91O.S. 8 O.S. 9

PIPE SUPPORTS

0

AllSettings

Blank orValue

SwitchPosition

1234


ISSUE 3

7.4 DEC 95

5

e) Category of Supports to be dimensioned.

98

ALIAS- 53 -

etails


D

SbSb



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 40

PIPE SUPPORTS


SWITCH POSITION 2 - Support Dimension Position.0 or blank Default for Support Dimensions to be drawn on the same side of

the pipe as the normal dimensions.

1 Support Dimensions drawn on the opposite side of the pipeline to the normal dimensions. (This causes any Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance set in Switch Positions 3&4 to be ignored).

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance.

0 or blank No Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance set. Program default will be used for all Support Dimensions.

Value Value equals the required Support Dimension Line Stand-Out Distance in whole mm.'s.

40 Contd.

Switch Layout

ISSUE 3


98

ALIAS- 54 -

etails


D

SbSb



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 40

PIPE SUPPORTS


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Selective Support Dimensioning.Blank Dimension All supports.1 Dimension Fabrication type Supports ONLY.2 Dimension Erection type Supports ONLY.3 Dimension Offshore type Supports ONLY.4 Dimension Erection & Offshore type Supports ONLY.

40 Contd.

Switch Layout

ISSUE 3

7.14 MAR 98Related Option Switches.

98

ALIAS- 55 -

ALIAS

etails


D

SbSb

- 56 -



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in eight parts.SWITCH POSITION 1 - Dimensional units type.

0 Default for Inch Pipeline bores and mm. linear dimensions.(Known as Mixed or SI units).

1 For Inch Pipeline bores and Feet & Inch linear dimensions.(Known as Imperial units).

2 For mm. Pipeline bores and mm. Linear dimensions.(Known as Metric units).


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 41

41Various combinations of Bore, Dimensional Units and Dimension Styles(including Stacked Fractions) are available, as defined below.There is also a control to determine how the numeric part of a metric co-ordinate is formatted.Finally, this switch is also used for component weight output control.Weight per unit length can be specified in different units to those used onthe isometric.Notes.The pipeline input file must be in the units specified in this Option Switch.1) Units for Bore and Weight data included in the input pipeline data fileare set in Option Switch 65.2) Bolt Length and Bolt Diameter units set in this Option Switch may bechanged by using Option Switch 65.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 61 - WEIGHT FACILITY. DEV. NO. 64 - EXTERNAL WEIGHT / C of G.DEV.NO. 83F - DIMENSIONING

ENHANCEMENTS

BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHTCONTROL

7.0 OCT 93Related Option Switches. 7.2 APR 95

0 SwitchPosition

123456

AllSettings

7

ISSUE 2

8

7.4 DEC 95MAY 997.17.7

DEC 008.5.4

O.S. 65

9

41. Bore/Dimension/Weight Control

ALIAS


- 57 -

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Feet-Inch output & Stacked Fractions .

0 For standard output of FT INS dimensions- of the form 6’ 10. 3/8”

1 Same as value 0 but with an added dash- of the form 6’ - 10.3/8”

2 Same as value 1 but with a blank space instead of a dot (.)between inches and fractions of an inch -of the form 6’ - 10 3/8”

3 Stacked Fractions with a dash - of the form 6’ - 104 Stacked Fractions without a dash - of the form 6’ 105 Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place.6 Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places.7 Output decimal inches to 3 decimal places.8 Output decimal inches to 4 decimal places.



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


OPT - 41

41 Cont.BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL

ISSUE 2

Switch Settings


83/ "


83/ "

Switch Layout

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Co-ordinate Output format (for Metricco-ordinates only).

0 For Metric dimensions/co-ordinates output in mm.1 For Metric co-ordinates output in M.mm format.2 For Metric dimensions output in M.mm format3 For Metric dimensions/co-ordinates in M.mm format.

APR 038.11.0

ALIAS


- 58 -



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


OPT - 41


ISSUE 2

Switch Settings



SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weight Information Output / Weight Units.

0 Default for NO Weight information to be output. (This applies to ALL outputs I.e. Material Lists, Weight output on Drawing Frame, Material Control Files, etc.).1 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms (KGS).2 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds (LBS).3 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms / Metre (KGS/M).4 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds / Metre (LBS/M).5 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Kilograms / Foot (KGS/FT).6 All Weights - Input / Output to be in Pounds / Foot (LBS/FT).

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Component Weight Output

0 or Blank Default for NO Component Weight output on Material List.1 Any Component Weight output will be a Total Weight (I.e.

Quantity x Unit Weight).2 Any Component Weight output will be the individual

Weight of each component type (i.e. No multiplication x Quantity).

Switch Layout

ALIAS


- 59 -



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


OPT - 41


ISSUE 2

Switch Settings


SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 - Imperial Dimension Output Format(Inches or Feet-Inches)

0 For program to change dimensioning from INCHES to FEET-INCHES at 24”.

1 For dimensions to be output in INCHES.Value The value is set to a number of whole inches at which output

style changes from INCHES to FEET-INCHES.Valid input is 12 or greater.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Suppression of Bore (N.S.) output at Branch (Tee / Olet / Cross) and Reducer locations

0 N.S. information output at Branches & Reducers as normal.1 N.S. information output at Branches & Reducers to be

suppressed.


Switch Layout

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Nominal size output separately on pipe section for set-on-tee and crosses

Blank N.S. output at set-on-tee and crosses combined1 N.S. output at set-on-tee and crosses shown separately

etails


D

SbSb

42. Drawing viewpoint



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 42

42This Option Switch controls the Viewing Direction (isometric orientation). There are four orientation options which may be chosen by the User and the selected one is indicated on the isometric by the direction the North Arrow is pointing.A secondary use of the Option Switch permits the User to request the North arrow to be highlighted by an enclosing box.

1.0 APR 83NONE

AllSettings

DRAWING VIEWPOINT

0 Default for North Arrow to point Top Left.

1 For North Arrow to point Bottom Right.

2 For North Arrow to point Top Right.

3 For North Arrow to point Top Left.

4 For North Arrow to point Bottom Left.

5 For North Arrow to point Bottom Right with enclosing box.

6 For North Arrow to point Top Right with enclosing box.

7 For North Arrow to point Top Left with enclosing box.

8 For North Arrow to point Bottom Left with enclosing box.

0

SwitchPosition

1

ALIAS- 60 -

etails


D

SbSb

43. Pipe wastage factor - Area 1



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 43

43

1.0 APR 83NONE

PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREA 1

This Option Switch is for Pipe Wastage in Plant Area 1.

0 For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

1 Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Basic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File).

Value Where Value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the Basic Wastage Factor (input on appropriate records in the Pipeline Data Input File) to arrive at a final Wastage Factor percentage. (e.g. A value of 2 in this Option Switch would give a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the Pipeline Data Input File).

0

Zero orValue

2

Controls any additional Pipe quantity that needs to be added to the Material List to allow for Wastage during fabrication.The Option Switch is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe Wastage allowances. Each of the nine Option Switches is applicable to a particular Plant Area which can be identified in the Pipeline Input Data File.

SwitchPosition

1

O.S. 44 to O.S. 51 inclusive.


44 45 46 494847 5150

ALIAS- 61 -

etails


D

SbSb




Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 44

44

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1

O.S. 43 and O.S. 45 to O.S. 51 inclusive.



43 45 46 494847 5150

ALIAS- 62 -

etails


D

SbSb

45. Pipe wastage factor - Area 3ISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 45

45

1.0 APR 83NONE



0 For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. (This setting allows the User to obtain NO increase in Pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included

in the Pipeline Data Input File).

1 Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. (This value does Not increase the Baisic Wastage percentage that may be set in applicable records in the Pipeline Input Data File).


0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 43 and O.S. 44 and O.S. 46 to O.S. 51 inclusive.


43 44 46 494847 5150

ALIAS- 63 -

etails


D

SbSb




Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 46

46

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 43 to O.S. 45 and O.S. 47 to O.S. 51 inclusive.


43 44 45 494847 5150

ALIAS- 64 -

etails


D

SbSb

47. Pipe wastage factor - Area 5ISOGEN



Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 47

47

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1




43 44 45 494846 5150

ALIAS- 65 -

etails


D

SbSb




Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 48

48

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1




43 44 45 494746 5150

ALIAS- 65 -

etails


D

SbSb




Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 49

49

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 43 to O.S. 48 and O.S. 50 and O.S. 51 inclusive.


43 44 45 484746 5150

ALIAS- 66 -

etails


D

SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 50

50

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2 SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 43 to O.S. 49 and O.S. 51 inclusive.


43 44 45 484746 5149

ALIAS- 67 -

etails


D

SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 51

51

1.0 APR 83NONE






0

Zero orValue

2


SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 43 to O.S. 50 inclusive.43 44 45 484746 5049

ALIAS- 68 -

etails


D

SbSb

52. Equipment trim drawings



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITION 1 - Part Number sequencing on the Material List.0 Part Numbers starting at 1 for each Nozzle. 1 Parts sequentially numbered (starting at 1) for the whole

Material List.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Material Control File content for Equipment Trim entries.

0 or blank All components related to a single Equipment Item accumulated and written to the Material Control file under a single 'Pipeline' entry. Equipment Trim Reference is used as the 'Pipeline Reference' for identification purposes.

1 Components for each Nozzle kept separate and written to the Material Control file using the individual Pipeline Reference associated with each Nozzle.


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 52

52EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS

This Option Switch controls the various functions (listed below) related to the generation of Equipment Trim (Vessel Trim) drawings and associated Material Control files.

0

Either Setting

2 SwitchPosition

1

DEV. NO. 34 - EQUIPMENT TRIM FACILITY.

3

Zero, blank or one

Blank orone

5.8 MAY 89

ALIAS- 69 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITION 3 - Style of Input Data File.

0 Single Pipeline type file (where there is only one set of Header Records).

1 Multiple Pipeline type file (where there are Multiple sets of Header Records).

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 52

EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS 52 Cont.

ALIAS- 70 -

etails


D

SbSb

53. Weld numbering



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 53

53

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING UPGRADE.DEV. NO. 58 - ISO REPEATABILITY STAGE II.DEV. NO. 74D - SUPPORT WELD PREFIX AND

NUMBERING SEQUENCES

WELD NUMBERING

This Option Switch is in seven parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld Number text size & Weld type to be numbered.

Notes. 1) All the above size values are only valid when Weld Numbers are being plotted in the original circular style enclosures. 2) This Option Switch Position should be set to value 0, 1, 2 or 3 if Position 4 is set to value 0 or 1.


7.0 OCT 93

0

AllSettings

SwitchPosition

1234


ISSUE 2

5

7.4 DEC 95

0 Default for No Weld Numbers.1 For Small size Weld Numbers 1.5mm high.2 For Medium size Weld Numbers 1.8mm high.3 For Large size Weld Numbers 2.1mm high.4 To number only Fabrication type welds - Small size.5 “ “ “ “ “ “ - Medium size.6 “ “ “ “ “ “ - Large size.7 To number only Erection type welds - Small size.8 “ “ “ “ “ “ - Medium size.9 “ “ “ “ “ “ - Large size.

67

Controls aspects related to the Weld Numbering function, thus:-i) Text Size.ii) Type of Welds that are to be numbered on the isometric.iii) Whether or not to plot a Weld Box / Operations Box.iv) Weld numbering sequence where multi-drawings for a pipeline

are produced.v) Individual Weld numbering by category.vi) Support Weld numbering sequence.

7.16.0 MAY 99

8

8.11.0 APR 03

9

75 7754

ALIAS- 71 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version DateFirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Box / Operations Box generation.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Sequence Control.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Offshore Weld Number control.

Note This Option Switch Position should be set to value 2 whenPosition 1 is set to value 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 53

53 Cont.WELD NUMBERING

ISSUE 2


0 Default for No Weld / Operations Box.1 For Weld Box Summary to be plotted.2 For Operations Box Summary to be plotted / printed.

0 Default for Weld Number current sequence to continue oneach new drawing.

1 For Weld Numbers to commence at 1 on each new drawing.2 Spool isometric Weld Numbers to match Full isometric Weld

Numbers when using continuous Weld Numbers acrossdrawings.

3 Spool isometric Weld Numbers to match Full isometric WeldNumbers when using the Weld Number commencing at 1 oneach new drawing facility.

0 Default to have Offshore Weld Numbers generated.1 To Number Offshore Welds only.2 Offshore Welds NOT to be Numbered.

ALIAS- 72 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

ExtendedUse


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Individual Weld Numbering sequences.

Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 53

53 Cont.WELD NUMBERING

ISSUE 2


SWITCH POSITION 6 - Support Weld sequences.0 Use same sequence as that used for standard Welds.1 Single sequence for all Support Welds.2 Individual sequence for each Support Weld category.

0 or Blank Single sequence for all Welds.1 Individual sequence for each Weld category.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Support Weld Numbering sequences.0 Support Weld sequence to continue on each new drawing.1 Support Weld Numbers to commence at 1 on each new

drawing.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Alphabetic Weld Identifiers generated

0 Numeric Weld Identifiers 1 Alphabetic Weld Identifiers

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Number of characters in the Weld Identifier

0 No leading characters output before weld identifier Value Number of characters output before weld identifier

( Please note Position 8 & 9 cannot be used in conjunction with fixed sizeweld enclosures, if requested they will automatically be changed to variable size circular enclosure type.)

ALIAS- 73 -

etails


D

SbSb

54. Weld plotting



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Controls which types of Welds are plotted on the isometric.The various switch settings permit different types of Welds either to be plotted or not, to suit the particular type of isometric being generated.A further specialised option causes all program generated Site Welds to be changed into Fabrication Welds.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 54

54

1.0 APR 83DEV NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES ELLIPTICAL AND DOUBLE CIRCLES

WELD PLOTTING

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld types and plotting options

0 Default to have all types of welds plotted.1 To have all welds suppressed.2 To have only Site welds plotted.3 To have only Fabrication welds plotted.4 To change Site welds generated by the program into

Fabrication welds. (This action does Not change user insertedSite Welds).

Notes.

i) Whenever this Option Switch is set to 1, 2 or 3, Option Switch53 which controls Weld Numbering should be set to the samerequirements.

ii) Whenever this option Switch is set to 4 to change Site weldsinto Fabrication welds, the program will also change the typeof Weld numbers generated.

0

All Settings

SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 53 O.S. 75 O.S. 77 O.S. 78

ISSUE 2

8.10.0 MAY 02

234567

ALIAS- 74 -

ALIAS


- 75 -



Options

Switch Settings

OPT - 54

54 cont.WELD PLOTTING

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Numbering - Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Fabrication Welds.

0 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2characters.

1 to 8 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to valueset.

9 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Erection Welds.

0 / 1 to 8 / 9 As Switch Position 2 - see above.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Offshore Welds.


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Support Weld Numbering - Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Fabrication Welds.

0 Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixedto 2 characters.1 to 8 Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed

to value set.9 Support Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures

variable sizes.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Support Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Erection Welds.


SWITCH POSITION 7 - Support Weld Numbering Circular or Elliptical Enclosures for Offshore Welds.


ISSUE 2


SbSb

55. Program messages - Run informationISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 55

55This Option Switch controls the volume of data that is written to the Message File (and to the screen during interactive processing) regarding 'Program Running and Plotfile Generation' information.

1.0 APR 83

PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION

0 Default for minimum Running information. ISOGEN Programversion identification and Plot file generation messages are output.

1 As for 0 above with the addition of ISODAT and ISOPLOTmodule running messages.

Running messages.

2 As for 1 above with the addition of information related to theprogress of the isometric through the ISOPLOT module.

0

AllSettings

SwitchPosition

1

SWITCH POSITION 2 - ‘Disconnection’ Message.

0 Output ‘Disconnection’ message local to pipeline break whereincreased tolerance used to connect pipeline.

1 Suppression of local ‘Disconnection’ message where increasedtolerance used to connect pipeline.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Running Information.

3 2

MAY 997.16.0

NONE

Related Option Switches.O.S. 21

Zeroor One

ALIAS- 76 -


SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 55

55 cont.PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Disconnected Pipeline.

0 Set pipeline to disconnected when increased tolerance used toconnect pipeline. Output of ‘Disconnected Pipeline’ message attop of drawing.

1 Suppresses ‘Disconnected Pipeline’ message at top of drawingif pipeline has connected using the increased tolerance(message will always be output if pipeline does not connectusing increased tolerance).


ALIAS- 77 -


SbSb

56. Program messages - IsodatISOGEN



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 56

56This Option Switch controls the output of program diagnostic information to the Message File by the ISODAT program during processing.

Note. This Option Switch Is A Special Purpose One. It Should Not Be Set By Users, Only By Alias System Support Personnel.

1.0 APR 83NONE

PROGRAM MESSAGES - ISODAT

0 Default for No diagnostic messages from ISODAT.

0

Zero orValue

SwitchPosition

1

ALIAS- 78 -

etails


D

SbSb

57. Program messages - Isoplot



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 57

57This Option Switch controls the output of program diagnostic information to the Message File by the ISOPLOT program during processing.

Note. This Option Switch Is A Special Purpose One. It Should Not Be Set By Users, Only By Alias System Support Personnel.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for No diagnostic messages from ISOPLOT.

0

Zero orValue

SwitchPosition

1

PROGRAM MESSAGES - ISOPLOT

ALIAS- 79 -

etails


D

SbSb

58. Clear screen



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 58

58This Option Switch is used to control the clearing of the graphics screen when isometrics are sent to the screen rather than to a plot file.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for No automatic Screen Clear.

1 Provides automatic clearing of the screen before showing the first isometric.

Note. With the introduction of modern Screen Drivers it is possible that a Clear Screen operation will be performed automatically. The setting of this Option Switch will have no effect in these cases,

CLEAR SCREEN

0

EitherValue

SwitchPosition

1

ALIAS- 80 -

etails


D

SbSb

59. Instrument identification



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 59

59Controls which particular 3D Design System parameter is used by ISOGEN for Instrument identification on the Material List or any Material Control file that is generated. Typically, 3D Design Systems have parameters for both the Instrument Name (Tag) and the Specification Reference (Item Code), but only one of these may be selected for output.

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for the Instrument Name (Tag) to be output.

1 For the Instrument's Specification Reference (Item Code) to be output.

INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION

0

EitherValue

SwitchPosition

1

ALIAS- 81 -

etails


D

SbSb

60. Component tagging



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch controls the plotting of Tags / Names on most pipeline components. 'Tagging' of Pipe (Tube) and pipeline elements made from Pipe (Tube) is not supported. 'Tagging' of Instruments is controlled by Option Switch 123. Tags / Names may be switched On or Off to suit the users requirement. A secondary option when plotting Tags / Names is to have the text boxed in with a surrounding enclosure.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 60

60

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 32 - EXTENSION OF COMPONENT

NAMING FACILITY.

0

AllSettings

0 Default for Tags / Names Not to be plotted.

1 To have Tags / Names plotted and boxed in.

2 To have Tags / Names plotted but Not boxed in.

COMPONENT TAGGING

1 SwitchPosition

5.5 FEB 88Related Option Switches.

O.S. 123123

ALIAS- 82 -

etails


D

SbSb

61. Insulation indication



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 61

61

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 13 - INSULATION INDICATION ON FITTINGS.

INSULATION INDICATION

0 Default to have dashed Insulation lines plotted alongside pipeonly, with a gap of 1 mm.

1 To Suppress Insulation indication.

2 To have dashed Insulation lines plotted alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1 mm gap.

Note. When Tracing is also shown, Insulation is only drawn on one side of the pipe.

0

AllSettings

This Option Switch controls Insulation indication on the isometric in the form of dashed lines plotted on each side of the pipe and optionally, around components.The feature may switched On or Off to suit the Users requirement.

1 SwitchPosition


O.S. 624.0 JUN 86

62

ALIAS- 83 -

etails


D

SbSb

62. Tracing indication



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 62

62

1.0 APR 83

0 Default to have chain dotted Tracing lines plotted alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.

1 To Suppress Tracing indication.

2 To have chain dotted Tracing lines plotted alongside pipe andall components, both with a 1 mm gap.

TRACING INDICATION

This Option Switch controls the plotting of Tracing indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components.This may switched On or Off to suit the Users requirement.

DEV. NO. 12 - TRACING INDICATION ON FITTINGS.


O.S. 61

0

AllSettings

1 SwitchPosition

4.0 JUN 8661

ALIAS- 84 -

etails


D

SbSb

63. Printed output - Page length



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 63

63

1.0 APR 83NONE

PRINTED OUTPUT -PAGE LENGTH

This Option Switch controls the number of lines per page on any Printed Output (Reports) generated by the ISOGEN system.

0 Default for 55 lines per page.

Value Where Value is the required number of lines to be output per page.

0

Zero orValue

23

Switch Settings

1 SwitchPosition

ALIAS- 85 -

etails


D

SbSb

64. Pipe support identification



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch controls the identification information that is output for Pipe Supports on the isometric and parts list. For identification purposes, either the Support Name (Tag) or Specification Reference (Item Code) may be used, in the combinations listed below.A further option allows certain support information to be passed to the COMDACE Material Control system.COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 64

64

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 50(A) - ISOGEN TO 'COMPIPE' LINK.

0 Default for No Support Names (Tags) to be output on the isometric and with the Specification Reference (Item Code) output in the Item Code field of the Material List.

1 For Support Names (Tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and Support Names in the Item Code field of the Material List.

2 For boxed Support Names (Tags) output on the isometric and Specification Reference in the Item Code field of the Material List.

3 As for Value 1 except Supports to be excluded from the Material List

4 As for Value 2 except Supports to be excluded from the Material List

10 Causes Support Names (Tags) to be passed to the COMDACE Material Control system. (PASCE System Users only).

0

AllSettings

2 1 SwitchPosition

PIPE SUPPORT IDENTIFICATION

6.0 MAR 91

ISSUE 2

7.7 AUG 96

ALIAS- 86 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 65

65

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL

LIST.

Determines how Bolts are to be reported in terms of Diameter and Length on the Material List and in the Material Control file, and also whether or not they are to be included in the Material Control (MATC) file.Actual data for Bolt Diameters and Length included in any Pipeline Data File must be in the Units specified in this Option Switch.

This option Switch is in two parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Bolt Length Units and Material Control file option.0 Default - whereby O.S. 41 Units setting is followed.1 For Inch Lengths. 2 For mm. Lengths.3 For No Bolts to be included in the MATC file.

(Normally, Bolts will be included).

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Bolt Diameter Units.

Blank Default - whereby O.S. 41 Units setting is followed.1 For Inch Diameters.2 For mm. Diameters.

0

Zero or Value

SwitchPosition

Blank or Value

7.0 OCT 93

BOLTING UNITS


O.S. 41 8.11.0 APR 03


2 13

Blank or Value

65. Bolting units

ALIAS- 87 -

ALIAS


- 88 -



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 65

65 Cont.

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL

LIST.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Allows bolts to excluded from Material Control File

0 Output bolts to the Material Control File

1 Suppress the output of bolts to the Material Control File

7.0 OCT 93

BOLTING UNITS


O.S. 41

Bolts can now be excluded from the Material Control file.

(NOTE - Bolts can be suppressed from outputting to the Material ControlFile by setting Position 1 = 3. Using the new Position 3 does not allow boltslengths to be controlled in the Material List)


8.11.0 APR 03

etails


D

SbSb

66. Co-ordinates - Supplementary



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This option Switch is in six parts.


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

66

7.0 OCT 93DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING & CO-ORDINATE UPGRADE.DEV. NO. 83D - REFERENCE ITEMS -

CO-ORDINATES, THICKNESS & LAYER.DEV. NO. 83E - PIPE SUPPORTS - CO-ORDINATES.

0

AllSettings

SwitchPosition

1234

CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

56

Controls the numerous output combinations that are available for theplotting of N/S and E/W Co-ordinates and Elevations at Bend and Teeintersection points, and at Isometric Split Points.A further option is the output of Co-ordinates and Elevations alongWitness Lines rather than on the usual arrowed-out message lines.Co-ordinates can be output at reference items and at pipe supports.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Co-ordinates and Elevations output as arrowed-out messages or on Witness Lines atBend and Tee intersection points.

0 Default for arrowed-out message type.1 Co-ordinates and Elevations output along Witness Lines.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Co-ordinates and Elevations output at Bendsand Elbows.

0 Default, only output Elevations when changed.1 No Elevations or Co-ordinates to be output.2 Output Elevations and Co-ordinates that have changed.3 Output a full set of Co-ordinates.

Related Option Switches. 8.3.0 JUL 00

ALIAS- 89 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 66

66 Cont.


SWITCH POSITION 3 - Co-ordinate & Elevation output at BranchIntersection Points

0 Default, only output Elevations when changed.1 No Elevations or Co-ordinates to be output.2 Output Elevations and Co-ordinates that have changed.3 Output a full set of Co-ordinates.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Co-ordinate output at Isometric Split Points.

0 Default, Co-ordinates not output.1 Full set of Co-ordinates output on both drawings.


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Co-ordinate output at Reference Items.

0 Co-ordinates not output at reference items.1 Co-ordinates output at reference items.


ALIAS- 90 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 66

66 Cont.


SWITCH POSITION 6 - Co-ordinate output at Pipe Supports

0 Co-ordinates not output at pipe supports.1 Co-ordinates output at Fabrication pipe supports only.2 Co-ordinates output at Erection pipe supports only.3 Co-ordinates output at Offshore pipe supports only.4 Co-ordinates output at all pipe supports.



ALIAS- 91 -

etails


D

SbSb

67. Sloping pipeline - 3D skew depiction



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 67

67

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 11 - 3D SLOPING PIPELINE OUTPUT

AS 2D + FALL INDICATOR.

Controls the method to be used for the depiction Sloping (Falling) sections of a Pipeline that are skewed in the horizontal plane. Two alternatives are available :- i) Full 3D Skew Depiction. (Box or Triangle style). ii) 2D Skew Depiction (Box or Triangle style) + a Fall Indicator.

0 Default for full 3D Box / Triangle depiction.

1 2D Skew (Box or Triangle) + Fall Indicator.

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

SLOPING PIPELINE - 3D SKEW DEPICTION


O.S. 19 O.S. 20 O.S. 99 APR 875.4

19 20 99

ALIAS- 92 -

etails


D

SbSb

68. Sloping pipeline - Vertical branches



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Controls the drawing depiction method to be used when a vertical Branch connection is to be made to a Sloping (Falling) Pipeline using a special Zero Length Bend component. This special Bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the Vertical Branch and the Sloping Pipeline.Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box section between the branch and the main pipe, while the other does not. Where Olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the Branch is not developed.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 68

68

APR 87DEV. NO. 2 - ZERO LENGTH BENDS.

SLOPING PIPELINE -VERTICAL BRANCHES

0 Default to show the Short Tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets will have an orientation message instead of a skewed section. Both will be dimensioned separately to the connecting pipe.

1 For No separate skew section, the vertical Branch is connected straight into the main pipe. Olets will Not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive dimension.

In both cases the angle between the vertical Branch and the Sloping (Falling) pipeline will be indicated.

5.4

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

ALIAS- 93 -


SbSb

69. Terminal type identification



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 69

69

6.0 MAR 91VERSION 6 RELEASE NOTES.

TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION

Used to identify the type of graphics terminal.The switch is a two part one where the basic terminal type is set in switchpositions 1, 2 and 3, with switch position 4 being used to denote single or dualscreen use.Note. This Option Switch is only relevant when the graphics output is sent tothe terminal screen rather than to an output file.

0

AllSettings

234

Blankor One

1 SwitchPosition


SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Terminal Type.0 The Default varies with the computer type.

e.g. a setting of 0 gives a Value of 3 on VAX, 7 on Apollo,12 on HP Starbase, etc.

3 Tektronix 410X, 420X . 4 Westward 2000 and 2015 monochrome family. 5 Westward C2015 colour terminal. 6 IBM GDDM. 7 Apollo. 8 Tektronix 4111. 9 IBM PC emulating Tektronix 410X, 420X. 10 Westward 3220 / 2320.


ALIAS- 94 -


SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 69

69 Contd.


11 VAX VWS. 12 HP Starbase. 13 HP Starbase with X Windows. 14 DEC Windows. 15 Workstation / PC (Packet Driver).16 Silicon Graphics.SWITCH POSITION 4 - Dual Screen use.Blank Default for single screen operation.1 For dual screen operation.

TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION

ALIAS- 95 -


SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 70

70Optionally permits simple skewed Branch legs to have the normal Skew Box / Triangle enclosure suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the Branch Orientation. When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum number of fittings permitted in the Branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this will be drawn with the normal Skew Box / Triangle enclosure.

5.4.1 FEB 88DEV. NO 35 - SUPPRESSION OF SKEW BOXES / TRIANGLES ON BRANCH LEGS.

0 Default for all Branches to be drawn with normal Skew Box / Triangle depiction.

Value Suppress Skew Box / Triangle depiction on Branch Legs whose number of components is less than or equal to the Value set, and output an Orientation Message.

Note. This facility is only available on straight through Branches. Any change in direction along the Branch will automatically cause the program to default to normal Skew Box / Triangle output.

SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES

0

Zero or Value

1 SwitchPosition

23

Blank or 1

8.11.0 APR 03

( Continued overpage )

70. Skew indication - Branches

ALIAS- 96 -

ALIAS


- 97 -



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 70

70 Cont.

Skew orientation directions can now be output showing rotation relativeto previous position or rotation from primary direction

5.4.1 FEB 88DEV. NO 35 - SUPPRESSION OF SKEW BOXES / TRIANGLES ON BRANCH LEGS.

Switch Position 3 - Skew rotation depiction

0 Orientation direction message relative to previous position

1 Orientation direction message relative to primary direction

SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES

( Continued from previous page )

etails


D

SbSb

71. Plotfile format



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in six parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Plotfile Output Format.

0 Default for ISOGEN plotfile format (ISO).3 Postscript (PSC), Backing Frame unavailable.4 AutoCAD V12 DXF format, Backing Frame optional.8 MicroStation DGN V7 and below, Backing Frame

mandatory.11 Alias internal Smart format (POD), Backing Frame optional.16 AutoCAD DXF Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory.

The AutoCAD DXF Plotfile version will be the same as that ofthe DXF Backing Frame.

(Continued overpage).

This Option Switch controls :-i) Plotfile Output Format. The Smart Format of graphics relates to aPlotfile that has (a) vectors associated with a pipeline component groupedtogether to form a single object in the drawing file (b) has some nongraphical attributes associated with the symbol (Tags/Attributes).ii) File format of any nominated Backing Frame and Detail Sketch files.iii) The generation of an I01 type filename extension.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 71

71

6.0 MAR 91VERSION 6.0 RELEASE NOTES DEV. NO. 62 - DETAIL SKETCHES FACILITYV8.10.0 RELEASE NOTES

PLOTFILE FORMAT

7.0 OCT 94

0Switch

Position1234

AllSettings

Related Option Switches.O.S. 92 O.S. 138

567

AllSettings

ISSUE 3

AllSettings

7.14.4 JUL 98

ALIAS- 98 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Switch Settings

OPT - 71

71 Cont

(Continued from previous page).

17 AutoCAD DWG Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory.The AutoCAD DWG Plotfile version will be the same as thatof the DWG Backing Frame.

18 MicroStation DGN V7 and below Smart format, BackingFrame mandatory.

19 SmartSketch IGR Smart format, Backing Frame mandatory.

20 SmartPlant SHAPE2D SHA Smart format, Backing Framemandatory.

21 MicroStation DGN V8 and above Smart format, BackingFrame mandatory.

SWITCH POSITION 4, 5 & 6 - Backing Frame and Detail Sketch fileformat.

Note: Format must match that specified for the Plotfile Output as set inPosition 1, 2 & 3 and must be of the same CAD system version as therequested Plotfile Output Format.

4 AutoCAD V12 DXF format.8 MicroStation DGN V7 and below format.11 Alias internal Smart format (POD)16 AutoCAD DXF format. The generated plotfile will be the

same AutoCAD DXF version as this Backing Frame.17 AutoCAD DWG format, Backing Frame mandatory. The

generated plotfile will be the same AutoCAD DWG versionas the Backing Frame.

18 MicroStation DGN V7 and below format.19 SmartSketch IGR Smart format.20 SmartPlant SHAPE2D SHA format.21 Smart MicroStation DGN V8 and above.

PLOTFILE FORMAT

ISSUE 3

ExtendedUse

8.10.0 MAY 02Related Option Switches.

O.S. 92 O.S. 138

ALIAS- 99 -

ALIAS


- 100 -



Options

Switch Settings

OPT - 71

71 Cont


SWITCH POSITION 7 - Generation of I01 type file name extension.

0 For normal filenames / extensions.1 To have I01 type filename extensions on all plotfiles

generated that do not use a user defined plotfile prefix.2 To have the plotfile output format extension appended to the

I01 type filename extension on all plotfiles generated that donot use a user defined plotfile prefix.

PLOTFILE FORMAT

ISSUE 3

ExtendedUse

8.10.0 MAY 02Related Option Switches.

O.S. 92 O.S. 138

etails


D

SbSb

72. Reserved



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 72

72RESERVED

ALIAS- 101 -

etails


D

SbSb

73. Material part number enclosure style



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in four parts.

SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Style 1 Enclosure Box size.0 Default for the standard part number box enclosure with no

additional Style 1 Enclosure Box.Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that

dynamically determines the size of the additional Style 1 Enclosure Box.


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 73

73

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL

LIST.

0Switch

Position123456

AllSettings

7

The Material Part Number enclosure Shapes controlled by O.S. 76 can be further varied by the use of one of three alternative Blank Enclosures Styles controlled by this Option Switch.A Style 1 enclosure is a Blank Box of variable size and shape output below the Standard Material Part number.A Style 2 enclosure is an extended Standard Material Part Number box with a Blank section.A Style 3 enclosure is for the output of Weld Part Numbers for Welds that have been included on the Material List, and like Style 2 will have a Blank section. This is a special function type enclosure that is only available when O.S. 23 - Position 2 is set to a value of 1.This Option Switch controls the Style, Shape and Size of these Blank boxes.All three styles provide a space for the manual addition of supplementary information to the isometric.


O.S. 76

ISSUE 2

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE STYLE

76

ALIAS- 98 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Style 2 Enclosure Box setting.0 Default for no extended Style 2 Enclosure Box.Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that

dynamically determines the size of the extended Style 2 Enclosure Box.

Note. The Style 2 Enclosure Box shape is controlled by the setting of O.S. 76.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Style 1 Enclosure Box shape.0 Enclosure Box with Square ends.1 Enclosure Box with Diamond ends.2 Enclosure Box with Round ends.

SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 - Style 3 Enclosure Box setting (For Welds on the Material List).

Blank Default for no extended Style 3 Enclosure Box.Value Where Value equals the number of blank characters that

dynamically determines the size of the extended Style 3 Enclosure Box.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 73

73 Contd.

ISSUE 2

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE STYLE


76

ALIAS- 99 -

etails


D

SbSb

74. Material list accumulation control



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


There are extensive options that determine how components are included on or excluded from the Material List.Materials may be processed by category - Fabrication, Erection or Offshore, and, furthermore, Gasket, Bolt and Weld Groups may be controlled separately.Non-accumulation means that each occurrence of an item will result in an individual entry being made on the Material List with a quantity of 1 off, or, in the case of Pipe, each individual length will be listed separately.Finally, there is an option to have nominated Material categories suppressed completely.

This Option Switch is in six parts.SWITCH POSITION 1 - Fabrication Materials.0 Default to have Fabrication items accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Fabrication items (excluding Pipe).2 For all Fabrication items to be suppressed. 3 For non-accumulation of Fabrication items (including Pipe). SWITCH POSITION 2 - Erection Materials.0 Default to have Erection items accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Erection items (excluding Pipe). 2 For all Erection items to be suppressed. (Continued overpage)

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 74

74

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 56 - USER DEFINED MATERIAL

LIST.

0Switch

Position123456

AllSettings

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATIONCONTROL

7.4 DEC 95

ISSUE 2

ALIAS- 100 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


(Continued from previous page)SWITCH POSITION 3 - Offshore Materials.0 Default to have Offshore items accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Offshore items (excl. Pipe). 2 For all Offshore items to be suppressed. SWITCH POSITION 4 - Gaskets. 0 Default to have Gaskets accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Gaskets. 2 For all Gaskets to be suppressed.SWITCH POSITION 5 - Bolts. 0 Default to have Bolts accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Bolts. 2 For all Bolts to be suppressed.SWITCH POSITION 6 - Welds. 0 Default to have Welds accumulated normally.1 For non-accumulation of Welds. 2 For all Welds to be suppressed.

Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 74

74 Contd.

Switch Settings

MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATIONCONTROL

ALIAS- 101 -

etails


D

SbSb

75. Weld number - Enclosure and prefix



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSUREWELD NUMBER - PREFIX

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 75

75

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES

Weld Numbers can optionally have a Weld Prefix character(s), and a variety of enclosure types.Both the Weld Number enclosure type and the Weld Prefix may be separately controlled for Shop, Site / Field and Offshore welds.Note. When the Weld Number enclosure style is not the original circular type then the Weld Number character size is controlled by O.S. 4 and not O.S. 53.

This Option Switch is in nine parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld Number Enclosure style for Shop Welds.

0 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle.1 Diamond ended box.2 Round ended box.3 Small triangular shaped enclosure.4 Small diamond shaped enclosure.5 Square ended box.6 Dynamically sized circle.7 No weld number enclosure.8 No shop weld numbers to be output on the plotted isometric.9 Elliptical weld enclosure.


0

Zeroor one

SwitchPosition123456

ISSUE 2

O.S. 53 O.S. 54 O.S. 777.6 MAY 96


789

8.10.0 MAY 02

Blankor one

Zeroor value

Zeroor one

Zeroor value

Zeroor value

Zeroor one

ALIAS- 102 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Prefix on Shop Welds.

0 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added.1 Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Enclosure style for Site / Field Welds.

0 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle.1 Diamond ended box.2 Round ended box.3 Small triangular shaped enclosure.4 Small diamond shaped enclosure.5 Square ended box.6 Dynamically sized circle.7 No weld number enclosure.8 No Site/Field weld numbers to be output on the plotted

isometric.9 Elliptical weld enclosure.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Prefix on Site / Field Welds.

0 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added.1 For Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Weld Number Enclosure style for OffshoreWelds.

0 Default for Weld Numbers in a fixed sized circle.1 Diamond ended box.2 Round ended box.3 Small triangular shaped enclosure.4 Small diamond shaped enclosure.5 Square ended box.6 Dynamically sized circle.7 No weld number enclosure.8 No Offshore weld numbers to be output on the plotted

isometric.9 Elliptical weld enclosure.

Switch Settings

OPT - 75

75 Contd.WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSUREWELD NUMBER - PREFIX

ISSUE 2

ALIAS- 103 -

ALIAS


- 104 -



Options


SWITCH POSITION 6 - Weld Prefix on Offshore Welds.

0 Default for No Weld Prefix to be added.1 For Weld Prefix added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Shop Welds.

0 Single line circle enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular


SWITCH POSITION 8 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Field / Site Welds.

0 Single line circle enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular


SWITCH POSITION 9 - Double line Weld Number Enclosure style for Offshore Welds.

0/Blank Single line circle enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number Enclosure (use with circular


Switch Settings

OPT - 75

75 Contd.WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSUREWELD NUMBER - PREFIX

ISSUE 2

etails


D

SbSb

76. Material part number enclosure shape



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Controls the Shape of the Box Enclosure used to surround the standard type of Material List Part Numbers on the isometric.(For details of an alternative Material List Part Number Box Enclosure Style - see O.S. 73).

Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 76

76

ISSUE 2

7.3 SEP 95

Description

Switch Layout

0

Zeroor Value

1 SwitchPosition

Switch Settings

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE


O.S. 73

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Material Part Number Enclosures

0 Default for standard enclosure box shape with rectangularends.

1 Enclosure box shape with Diamond ends.2 Enclosure box shape with Round ends.6 Circular enclosure.7 No enclosure box - only Part Number text plotted.8 No Part Numbers nor enclosure box plotted.

(Note. In this case, any setting in O.S. 73 is ignored).9 Elliptical enclosure.

Note. When set, values 1,2 and 7 above will also be applied to the shape ofthe alternative Style 2 Material List Part Number Enclosure Box ascontrolled by O.S. 73.

23

DEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES - ELLIPSES AND DOUBLE CIRCLES

8.10.0 MAY 02

ALIAS- 105 -

ALIAS

Details


- 106 -



Options

OPT - 76

76 cont

ISSUE 2

MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Single/Double Line Circular Material Part Number Enclosures

0 Single line Part Number enclosure.1 Double line Part Number enclosure (use with circular


SWITCH POSITION 3 - Material Part Number Circular or Elliptical Enclosure Size.

0 Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2 characters.

1 to 8 Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to valueset.

9 Part Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.

etails


D

SbSb

77. Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 77

77WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP-ON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS

Controls the quantity of Weld Numbers that are generated by the program at Slip-On Flange and Reinforcement Pad positions.On Reinforcement Pads, also controlled is the optional generation of an Item Code / Material Description on the Material List and the plotting of the Pad shape.Note. Reinforcement Pads may optionally exist on Set-On Tees / Crosses and on Trunnion type Pipe Supports.

This Option Switch is in four parts.SWITCH POSITION 1 - Quantity of Weld Numbers generated at Slip-On

Flanges.0 Default for 2 Weld Numbers.1 For 1 Weld Number.2 For 2 Weld Numbers.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Quantity of extra Weld Numbers generated at Reinforcement Pads.0 or blank Default for 0 extra Weld Numbers.1 For 1 extra Weld Number.2 For 2 extra Weld Numbers.Note. These are extra Weld Numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single and double branch connection Weld Numbers that are generated at Set-On Tee and Cross positions. (Continued over page)

02 Switch

Position13

Zero or one

7.4 DEC 95DEV. NO. 65G - WELD NUMBERS AT REINFORCEMENT PADS.

O.S. 53 O.S. 54 O.S.75


AllSettings

ISSUE 3

4

Value

7.13.0 FEB 98

5

Zero or one

8.10.0 MAY 02

67

Blankor value See over

ALIAS- 107 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Switch Settings

OPT - 77

77 Contd.WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP- ON FLANGES & REINFORCEMENT


ISSUE 3

SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Reinforcement Pads, controls the automaticgeneration of an Item Code and Material Description on the Material Listand a plotted shape for the Pad on the isometric.

0 Default for No generation of Item Code / Material Description and No plotted Pad shape.

1 For the automatic generation of an Item Code / MaterialDescription and a plotted Pad shape.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - For allocation of Weld Numbers on Fabricated ‘Y’ types.

0 or Blank Default for ONE Weld Number.1 ONE Weld Number.2 TWO Weld Numbers.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - For allocation of Weld Numbers on Tack Welds.

0 Weld Numbers allocated to Tack Welds.1 Weld Numbers not allocated to Tack Welds.

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Allocated for future use.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - For allocation of Weld Numbers to Victaulic Welded / Forged Ring Type Clamps (CLVR).

0 2 Weld Numbers allocated to Victaulic Clamp.1 to 9 Specified Weld Numbers allocated to Victaulic Clamp.

ALIAS- 108 -


SbSb

78. Support Weld Number Enclosures



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 78

78SUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIXAND ENCLOSURES

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Weld Number enclosure style for FabricationSupport Welds

0 Fixed size circle.1 Diamond ended box.2 Round ended box.3 Small triangular shape.4 Small diamond shape.5 Square ended box.6 Dynamically sized circle.7 No enclosure.8 Weld Number suppressed.9 Elliptical Weld Number enclosure.

0

SwitchPosition123456

Zeroor value

Support Weld Numbers can optionally have a Support Weld Prefix andbe output in a variety of different enclosure styles.

Both the Support Weld enclosure style and prefix can be separatelycontrolled for Shop, Site and Offshore categories.


DEV. NO. 57 - WELDING FACILITIES UPGRADEDEV. NO. 74D - SUPPORT WELD PREFIX AND

NUMBERING SEQUENCESRelated Option Switches.O.S. 53

7.16.0 MAY 99

789

8.10.0 MAY 02

Zeroor value

Zeroor value

Zeroor one

Zeroor one

Zeroor one

Blankor one

ALIAS- 109 -


SbSb



Options

OPT - 78

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Weld Prefix on Fabrication Support Welds

0 No Weld Prefix to be added.1 Support Weld Prefix to be added to Weld Number.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Weld Number Enclosure Style for Erection Support Welds.


SWITCH POSITION 4 - Weld Prefix on Erection Support Welds.


SWITCH POSITION 5 - Weld Number Enclosure Style for Offshore Support Welds.


78 contSUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIXAND ENCLOSURES

ALIAS- 110 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

OPT - 78

78 cont

SWITCH POSITION 6 - Weld Prefix on Offshore Support Welds


SWITCH POSITION 7 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Fabrication Support Welds

0 Single line circle Weld Number enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular


SWITCH POSITION 8 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Erection Support Welds

0 Single line circle Weld Number enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular


SWITCH POSITION 9 - Double Line Weld Number Enclosure Style for Offshore Support Welds

Blank Single line circle Weld Number enclosure.1 Double line Weld Number enclosure (use with circular


SUPPORT WELD NUMBER PREFIXAND ENCLOSURES

ALIAS- 111 -

etails


D

SbSb

79. Site Assembly Identification



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 79

79SITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

Allows identification of flanged assemblies on the isometric drawingusing different enclosure types. It permits a table of assemblyinformation to be positioned on the drawing frame. This can be eitheron a per drawing or per pipeline basis.


SWITCH POSITION 1 - Output of flange assembly identification.

0 Flange assembly identification not output.1 Numeric flange assembly identification.2 Alpha flange assembly identification.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Flange assembly identification per drawing orper pipeline.

0 Flange assembly identification per drawing.1 Flange assembly identification per pipeline.


0

SwitchPosition1234

All settings


DEV. NO. 85 - SITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATIONDEV. NO. 89H - MESSAGE ENCLOSURES 8.4.0 JUL 00

56789

8.10.0 MAY 02

(5-8 unused)

All settings

ALIAS- 112 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


OPT - 79

79 contSITE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Enclosure type.

0 No enclosure.1 Diamond ended box enclosure.2 Round ended box enclosure.3 Triangular enclosure.4 Diamond enclosure.5 Square ended box enclosure.6 Circular enclosure.7 Double circle assembly enclosure.8 Elliptical assembly enclosure.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Output of Flange Assembly Table.

0 Flange assembly table not required on drawing.1 Flange assembly table required on drawing.

SWITCH POSITIONS 5-8 - Unused.

SWITCH POSITION 9 - Circular or Elliptical Weld Number Enclosures.

0 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to 2characters.

1 to 8 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures fixed to value set.

9 Weld Number circular or elliptical enclosures variable sizes.


ALIAS- 113 -

etails


D

SbSb

80. Dimensions - To valve centres



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Valves and straight through Instruments which have a Spindle may optionally be Dimensioned to their Centre Points rather than to their ends using either String or Composite Dimensions. Controls here permit the function to operate selectively, based upon the type of end connection, e.g. Socket Weld, Screwed, Compression, etc. This Option Switch can operate in conjunction with Option Switch 81 - which adds bore selectivity.

This Option Switch is in seven parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - For Butt Weld end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Butt Weld ends to be Dimensioned

across their length.1 For components with Butt Weld ends to have Centreline Dimensions.SWITCH POSITION 2 - For Compression end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Compression ends to be Dimensioned

across their length.1 For components with Compression ends to have Centreline Dimensions.SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Screwed end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Screwed ends to be Dimensioned across

their length.1 For components with Screwed ends to have Centreline Dimensions. (Continued overpage)

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 80

80

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE.

0

SwitchPosition

123456

AllSettings

7

DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES


O.S. 8181

ALIAS- 114 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


(Continued from previous page).SWITCH POSITION 4 - For Socket Weld end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Socket Weld ends to be

Dimensioned across their length.1 For components with Socket Weld ends to have Centreline

Dimensions.SWITCH POSITION 5 - For Flanged end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Flanged ends to be Dimensioned

across their length.1 For components with Flanged ends to have Centreline

Dimensions.SWITCH POSITION 6 - For Plain end Valves and Instruments.0 Default for components with Plain ends to be Dimensioned

across their length.1 For components with Plain ends to have Centreline

Dimensions.SWITCH POSITION 7 - For Hygienic end Valves and Instruments.Blank Default for components with Hygienic ends to be

Dimensioned across their length.1 For components with Hygienic ends to have Centreline

Dimensions.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 80

80 Contd.DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES


81

ALIAS- 115 -


SbSb

81. Dimensions - Branches



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch controls two separate functions :-i) Dimensions to the Centre Point of Valves and straight through

Instruments selectively based upon bore. This operates in conjunction with O. S. 80 - which operates on End type.

ii) Un-dimensioned Branch legs, selectively based upon Bore and / or on the number of components in the Branch

This Option Switch is in three parts.SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Dimensions to the Centre Point of Valves

and straight through Instruments.0 Default for Valves / Instruments that have their End Type set in

O.S. 80 to be Dimensioned to their Centre Point.Value For Valves / Instruments that have their End Type set in O.S. 80

and have a Bore equal to or less than the Value set to be dimensioned to their Centre Point. Value is in 1/16" or mm's depending upon the Bore units.

SWITCH POSITIONS 4, 5 & 6 -Branches within specified Bore range to be Un-dimensioned. (Works in conjunction

with Positions 7 & 8, if set - see next page).0 Default for all Branches to be Dimensioned.Value For Branches having a Bore equal to or less than Value to have

Dimnsions suppressed. Value is in 1/16" or mm's depending upon the Bore units.


Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 81

81

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 59 - DIMENSIONING UPGRADE.

Switch Settings

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES


O.S. 80

0

SwitchPosition

12345678

Zero or ValueZero or ValueZero or ValueBlank or Value

80

ALIAS- 116 -


SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 81

81 Contd.

Switch Settings (Continued from previous page) SWITCH POSITIONS 7 & 8 - Branches with a specified number of

components to be Un-dimensioned. (Works in conjunction with Positions 4, 5 and 6, if set, see previous page).

Blank Default for all Branches to be Dimensioned.Value For Branches having a number of Components equal to or less

than Value, to have Dimensions suppressed. Gasket and Bolt entries are counted as Components.Notes.i) Any Branch containing Pipe (100 record), Fixed Length Pipe (101 record) or Pipe Block (103 record) will not have Branch Dimension Suppression applied to it.ii) Branch Dimension Suppression using this Option Switch does not apply to Tapped Branches.iii) Switch Positions 4, 5 & 6 and 7 & 8 will work either independently of each other or together depending upon the Users requirements.

DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES


80

ALIAS- 117 -


SbSb

82. C of G / Weight output



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch allows the User to control the generation and output of additional Weight information not covered by Option Switch 41, plus a full range of C of G (Centre of Gravity) positions.Control over outputs for either single isometrics or the complete Pipeline is also provided.

Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 82

82C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT

This Option Switch is in five parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Outputs suppressed, by single isometric or by complete Pipeline.

0 None of the outputs controlled by this Option Switch are required.1 All nominated outputs are required per Drawing or per Spool

Drawing.2 All nominated outputs are required per complete Pipeline.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Output of Wet (Full) Weight.0 or blank Wet Weight Not required.1 Wet Weight Is required.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Output of Insulation Weight.0 or blank Insulation Weight Not required.1 Insulation Weight Is required.


Switch Settings

0

SwitchPosition

12345

Zero or Value

Blank or Value

Zero, Blank or Value


O.S. 41

DEV. NO. 64 - WEIGHT / C of G FACILITY. 7.2 FEB 95

41

ALIAS- 118 -


SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 82

C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT


SWITCH POSITION 4 - Output of Dry (Empty) C of G positions.0 or blank Dry (Empty) C of G position Not required.1 Dry (Empty) C of G position Is required.2 Dry (Empty) + Insulation C of G Is required.3 Dry (Empty) C Of G and Dry (empty) + Insulation C of G Are

both required.

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Output of Wet (Full) C of G positions.Blank Wet (Full) C of G position Not required.1 Wet (Full) C of G position Is required.2 Wet (Full) + Insulation C of G Is required.3 Wet (Full) C Of G and Wet (Full) + Insulation C of G Are

both required.

Switch Settings

82 Contd.


41

ALIAS- 119 -


SbSb

83. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 83

83SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 120 -


SbSb

84. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 84

84SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 121 -


SbSb

85. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 85

85SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 122 -


SbSb

86. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 86

86SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 123 -


SbSb

87. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 87

87SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 124 -

etails


D

SbSb

88. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 88

88SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 125 -


SbSb

89. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 89

89SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 126 -


SbSb

90. Material control - Comdace file contents



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 90

90

5.10 APR 90DEV. NO. 50 - ISOGEN TO COMPIPE LINK.

This Option Switch controls whether information written to the COMPIPE Material Control File is per Isometric drawing (COMPIPE Section) or per Complete Pipeline.

COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.

0 Default for entries in the .MTO (Material Take-Off) file to be per Isometric Drawing (COMPIPE section).

1 For entries in the .MTO (Material Take-Off ) file to be per Complete Pipeline.

6.0

MATERIAL CONTROL - COMDACE FILE CONTENTS

0

EitherSetting

SwitchPosition

MAR 91Related Option Switches.

O.S. 91

1

91

ALIAS- 127 -

etails


D

SbSb

91. Material control - Comdace file controls



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 91

91

5.10 APR 90DEV. NO. 50 - ISOGEN TO COMPIPE LINK.

Controls the following COMPIPE options :- 1) Whether User or Client Item Codes are to be used.2) Whether Short or Long Component Descriptions are generated on all

COMPIPE reports.3) Whether Pipe Supports are to be included in the COMPIPE .MTO

(Material Take-Off) file.COMDACE is a registered trademark of John Brown Systems Ltd.


SWITCH POSITION 1 - User or Client Item codes. 0 Default for User Item Codes to be used.1 For Client Item Codes to be used.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Long or Short Descriptions.0 or blank Default for Short Component Descriptions to be used. 1 For Long Component Descriptions to be used.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Pipe Supports in .MTO file. 0 or blank Default for Pipe Supports to be included in the COMPIPE

.MTO file. 1 For Pipe Supports Not to be included.

6.0

0

23

AllSettings

EitherSetting

AllSetting

SwitchPosition

1

MAR 91

MATERIAL CONTROL - COMDACE FILE CONTROLS


O.S. 9090

ALIAS- 128 -

etails


D

SbSb

92. DXF file units



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is used to identify the 'Units' setting for ALL DXF format files that are handled by the ISOGEN system.The actual Files used may be based upon either Imperial (Inches) or Metric (mm.) units and this Option Switch allows either one to be specified.This 'Units' value will apply to the following :-i) Drawing Underlay (Drawing Frame) DXF files.ii) Detail Sketch DXF files.iii) Output (Plot) files generated in DXF format.All input files used in any run MUST be generated using the same Units. (As specified using this Option Switch.Any mis-match in Units that is permitted to occur between the DXF files generated will result in incorrectly sized drawings.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 92

92

0 Default for Metric Units - mm's.

1 For Imperial Units - Inches.

7.0 OCT 94DEV. NO. 62 - DETAIL SKETCHES

LOCATION FACILITY.

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

DXF FILE UNITS


O.S. 7171

ALIAS- 129 -

etails


D

SbSb

93. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 93

93SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 130 -

etails


D

SbSb

94. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 94

94SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 131 -

etails


D

SbSb

95. Component leg length



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 95

95

6.0 MAR 91DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.

This Option Switch gives User control over the Plotted Leg Lengths ofElbows and fitting Tees and Crosses.This Leg Length control facility does not apply to Fabricated (Pulled) Bendsor Set-On (Stub-In) type Tees or Crosses.Pipe length scaling proportional to true length.

SWITCH POSITION 10 Default for standard Leg Length of 9mm.SWITCH POSITION 2Value Where Value is set to the required Leg Length in whole

mm’s. e.g. For a 12mm Leg Length, enter 12.SWITCH POSITION 30 Normal pipe scaling used to determine pipe lengths.1 Pipe lengths scaled proportionally to actual true lengths.

Warning! - Use the Plotted Leg Length control with care.Long Leg Lengths take up more space on the drawing and can sometimeshave an adverse effect on the finished isometric.The maximum value allowed is 18mm.The minimum value allowed is 6mm.

0

Zero or Value

2

Position

1

COMPONENT LEG LENGTH

3

8.5.0 DEC 00

Switch

45

0 or 1Zero

Blank, 1 or 2

8.11.0 APR 03


ALIAS- 132 -

ALIAS


- 133 -



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

OPT - 95

95 Cont.


Different connection leg depictions allowed with Multi-Port components.

SWITCH POSITION 40 Reserved

SWITCH POSITION 5

0 Dotted connection lines on all Multi-port fittings1 Dotted connection lines would only be generated when

necessary for picture clarification (example - where 2 ormore ports positioned on the same side with attached pipework running parallel to each other)

2 No dotted connection lines shown

COMPONENT LEG LENGTH

8.5.0 DEC 00

( Continued from previous page )

8.11.0 APR 03


SbSb

96. Reserved



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 96

96RESERVED

ALIAS- 131 -

etails


D

SbSb

97. Skew depiction - Individual / overall



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 97

97


This Option Switch controls how Skew pipe sections containing Branch connections are depicted in terms of the Skew indication on the isometric.Such Skews may be shown with either a series of separate Box / Triangle enclosures - one per Branch, or alternatively, a single overall one.

0 Default for a Single Overall Box / Triangle enclosure around the complete Skew section.

1 For individual Box / Triangle Skew enclosures to each Branch.

SKEW DEPICTION - INDIVIDUAL / OVERALL

0

EitherSetting

SwitchPosition

1


O.S. 9999

ALIAS- 132 -


SbSb

98. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 98

98SPARE SWITCH

ALIAS- 133 -

etails


D

SbSb

99. Skew depiction - Style



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Controls whether Skewed pipe sections are drawn with either Box orTriangle Skew depiction on the isometric, together with the form of SkewDimensioning to be used.A secondary option allows the selection of a mixture of 2D Skew Trianglesand 3D Skew Box depiction.Skew Dimensioning options offer either normal Dimensioning format(with witness lines etc.) or a simplified form when using Skew Triangleformat (actual Dimensions positioned along sides of Triangles with nowitness lines)

Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 99

99

APR 87DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND

FALLING PIPELINE INDICATION.

Switch Settings This Option Switch is in three parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Skew depiction style + Dimension style.

0 Default for Skew Box depiction with normal dimensioning.Dimension Line standout as per Option Switch 8.

1 Skewed Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning.Dimension Line position as per Option Switch 8.

2 Skewed Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning.Dimension Line position as per Option Switch 100.

3 Skewed Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning.Actual dimensions positioned close to sides of Triangle withno witness lines. Dimensions positioned in relation to Triangle as set in Option Switch 100

0

AllSettings

2

5.4

SwitchPosition

1

SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE


O.S. 8 O.S. 67 O.S. 70 O.S. 97 O.S. 100

Blank or 1

8.11.0 APR 03

( Continued overpage )

3

Blank, 1 or 2

8 7067 97 100

ALIAS- 134 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options


OPT - 99

99 Cont.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Mixture of 3D Boxes and 2D Triangles.

0 All Skew indications as set in Switch Position 1.1 For a Mixture of Skew indication types.

3D Skews indicated with Boxes.2D Skews indicated with Triangles.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Skew Angles

0 Skew angles not shown.1 Skew angles shown with arrow heads on the arc radius.2 Skew angles shown without arrow heads on the arc radius.

( NOTE - In order to use this facility the user is required to selectTriangle depiction of the skewed section i.e. Position 1 of Option Switch99 set to 1, 2 or 3. If Skew Box depiction is selected then no Skew Angleswill be output )


Switch Settings ( Continued from previous page )

8 7067 97 100

ALIAS- 135 -

etails


D

SbSb

100. Skew depiction - Dimension line standout



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 100

100

5.4 APR 87DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND

FALLING LINE INDICATION.

Allows the Dimension Line Standout distance used on Box or Triangle Skew Dimensions to be varied from the value set in Option Switch 8.

0 Default such that if Option Switch 99 = 0, 1, 2, 10, 11 or 12then the Dimension Line Standout Setting defined in Option Switch 8 is used.Or, if Option Switch 99 = 3, or 13 then the default Dimension Position is 4 mm.

Value Where Value is an alternative Dimension Line Standout in 1/10 mm. e.g. 120 = 12 mm.

SKEW DEPICTION - DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

0

Zero orValue

23 1 SwitchPosition


O.S. 9999

ALIAS- 136 -

etails


D

SbSb

101. Skew depiction - Triangle hatching



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

5.4 APR 87DEV. NO. 11 - SKEWED (OFFSET) AND FALLING

PIPELINE INDICATION.DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.


SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Hatching On / Off + Hatch Spacing.0 Default to set Skew Hatching Off. 1 To set Skew Hatching On with a default Hatch Line pitch of

1 mm. Value Where Value equals an alternative Hatch Line pitch in 1/10 mm.

e.g. For 2 mm Hatch Line pitch set 20.

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Hatch Line Cut-Off Length. Blank Default for No Hatch Line Cut-Off value.

All Triangles will be fully Hatched. Value Where Value equals Hatch Line Cut-Off Length in whole mm.

e.g. For 25 mm cut-off value, enter 25. In this case Hatch lines in excess of 25 mm. long will not be plotted. This gives a partial Hatched effect.

Controls the features of the Skew Triangle Hatching facility.Hatching On / Off , the pitch and maximum length of the Hatching lines to be plotted can also be controlled.

101

OPT - 101

SKEW DEPICTION - TRIANGLE HATCHING

0

AllSettings

234

Blank orValue

1 SwitchPosition


O.S. 996.0 MAR 91

99

ALIAS- 137 -

etails


D

SbSb

102. Skew depiction - Hatching clearance



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 102

102


0

2

Controls the physical size of the Un-hatched Gaps (White Areas) to be left local to the Pipeline, Pipeline In-line components and any Dimensions or Text elements that fall within any Skew Triangle Hatching.

3456

Blank or Value


SWITCH POSITIONS 1 & 2 - Gap local to Pipeline.0 Default for Gap local to Pipeline of 2.5 mm.Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm.

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 & 4 - Gap local to In-line Components.0 or blank Default for Gap local to In-line Components of 2.5 mm.Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm.

SWITCH POSITIONS 5 & 6 - Gap local to Dimensions and Text.Blank Default for Gap local to Dimensions/Text of 1.5 mm.Value Where Value is an alternative Gap in 1/10 mm

Blank, Zero or Value

Zero or Value

1 SwitchPosition

SKEW DEPICTION -HATCHING CLEARANCE


O.S. 101101

ALIAS- 138 -


SbSb

103. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

SPARE SWITCH 103

OPT - 103

ALIAS- 139 -


SbSb

104. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

SPARE SWITCH 104

OPT - 104

ALIAS- 140 -


SbSb

105. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

SPARE SWITCH 105

OPT - 105

ALIAS- 141 -


SbSb

106. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

SPARE SWITCH 106

OPT - 106

ALIAS- 142 -


SbSb

107. Spare switch



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

SPARE SWITCH 107

OPT - 107

ALIAS- 143 -

etails


D

SbSb

108. Pipeline splitting - In tube



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 108

108

DEV. NO. 48 - ISOMETRIC REPEATABILITY.

Allows the User to control the actions to be taken by the program whenever the ISOGEN Automatic Pipeline Split facility selects a Split Point that is located in a straight length of Tube.There are three options, as described below.

0 Default for Pipeline Splitting to function as normal when the Split point occurs along a section of Tube. The relevant Split Point information will be passed back to the 3D Design System via the Isometric Repeatability File, if being used.

1 If a Pipeline Split occurs along a section of Tube, the Warning Message - "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT" is written to the Message File. No plots are produced and No information will be written to the Isometric Repeatability File for the Pipeline.

2 If a Pipeline Split occurs along a section of Tube, the Warning Message - "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT" is written to the Message File. Plots are produced with the message "UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT" plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No information will be written to the IsometricRepeatability File for the Pipeline.

6.0

0

AllSettings

1 SwitchPosition

MAR 91

PIPELINE SPLITTING - IN TUBE


O.S. 109109

ALIAS- 144 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in eight parts.

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Return File Type.

0 Default for Standard Return File type (FOR052) containingjust a list of successfully processed pipelines.

1 For New Style format using a User Named file or FOR052System data file if there is No User Named file.

2 For New Style Repeatability File containing new records forspool information.

3 ASCII old style.4 ASCII new style.

Controls the type of Repeatability Information that is passed back to the host 3D Design System in the Isometric Return file.Also controlled is the actual Type of Return file that is required. The File Type options are :-1) An old style system data file that only contains 'Successful Plot' information. (File identifier is FOR052).2) A new style Return File that is generated as a system data file. (File identifier is FOR052).3) A new style Return File that has a User defined file name.4) A new style Return File that has additional spool information.5) Option for ASCII output.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

DEV. NO. 48 - ISO REPEATABILITY Phase I. DEV. NO. 58 - ISO REPEATABILITY Phase II.DEV.NO. 86H - REPEATABILITY FILE UPGRADE

REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT

0

Either Setting

23

OPT - 109

109

4567 1 SwitchPosition

7.0 OCT 93

6.0 MAR 91


8

ISSUE 3

8.5.4 DEC 00

109. Repeatability file content

ALIAS- 145 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

O 109

109 Contd.REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Data Extraction Start Point0 Default for the Data Extraction Start Point not to be written

to the Return File.1 For Data Extraction Start Point to be written to the Return

File.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - Pipeline Split Point Information0 Default for Split Point Information Not to be written to the

Return File.1 For the Split Point to be written to the Return File.

SWITCH POSITION 4 - Spool Number Identifier Information0 Default for Spool Number Identifiers not to be written to the

Return File.1 For Spool Number Identifies to be written to the Return File.2 For full alphanumeric Spool Identifiers to be written to the

Return File. (Maximum of 4 characters).

SWITCH POSITION 5 - Component Information0 Default for Component Information not to be written to the

Return File.1 For Component Information to be written to the Return File.2 For full alphanumeric Component Information to be written

to the Return File. (Maximum of 4 characters).

SWITCH POSITION 6 - By-pass component re-ordering0 Re-ordering of components at By-pass closure points to be

done.1 No re-ordering of components at By-pass closure points.

SWITCH POSITION 7 - Weld Number Information0 Default for Weld Number Information not to be written to

the Return File.1 For Weld Number Information to be written to the Return

File.

SWITCH POSITION 8 - Material List Part Number InformationBlank Default for Material List Part Number Information not to be

written to the Return File.1 For Material List Part Number to be written to the Return

File.

ALIAS- 146 -

etails


D

SbSb

110. Ghost gaps



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 110

110

DEV. NO. 47 - GHOST GAP FACILITY.

Controls the plotted length of a Ghost Gap element. (A Ghost Gap element is a physical 'Gap' on the plotted isometric that can be used when generating individual Pipeline isometrics, or as a link between related, but unconnected Pipelines on a 'System' type isometric).

0 Default for the normal Minimum Gap as controlled by the ISOGEN program.

Value Where Value is the User defined Minimum Gap dimension in whole mm's.

Notes. The Smallest allowable Value is 18 mm. The Largest allowable Value is 60 mm. The program will default to using the appropriate Maximum Value if a setting outside these limits is detected.

GHOST GAPS

0

Zero orValue

2 1 SwitchPosition

5.9 MAR 90

ALIAS- 147 -

etails


D

SbSb

111. Nozzles - Dotted



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 111

111

DEV. NO. 4 - DOTTED NOZZLE FACILITY.

Controls whether or not Equipment Nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric drawing.Also controls the calculation of of Nozzle Axes directions and insertion of this information into the PCF (Piping Component File) when using the PCFGEN program.


SWITCH POSITION 1 - Dotted Nozzle indication.

0 Default to suppress Dotted Nozzles.

1 To have Dotted Nozzles plotted on the isometric.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Nozzle Axis direction calculation.

Blank No calculation of Nozzle Axis direction.

1 Nozzle Axis direction calculated and inserted into the PCF.

NOZZLES - DOTTED

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

2.0 AUG 85

ISSUE 2

PCFGEN1.0 JUL 95

2

Blank or one

ALIAS- 148 -

etails


D

SbSb

112. Flow arrows - Pipeline



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 112

112

3.0 APR 86DEV. NO. 7 - USER POSITIONED FLOW ARROWS.

This Option Switch controls the use of Flow Arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the Pipeline's Fluid or Gas flow Direction.Note. A separate type of Flow Arrow which is plotted alongside in-line fittings may also be used, either as well as, or instead of this one on Pipe.

0 Default for Pipeline Flow Arrows to be plotted at the default scale factor of 8.

1 For Pipeline Flow Arrows to be suppressed.

Value For Pipeline Flow Arrows to be plotted at an alternative scale factor in the range Value 5 to 15 inclusive. (Value 5 gives smaller arrows, 15 larger).

Note. This type of Flow Arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the Pipeline Input Data File.

FLOW ARROWS - PIPELINE

0

Zero orValue

2 1 SwitchPosition

O.S. 17


17

ALIAS- 149 -


SbSb

113. Material control - Pipeline identification



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 113

113

1.0 APR 83NONE

This Option Switch controls the format of the Pipeline Reference (that is, Name) that is passed to the ISOGEN Material Control Transfer (MATC) File.

0 Default to pass the Full Pipeline Reference as contained in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE record. e.g. Pipeline Reference 6-LNG-6412A-CT15 in the Design Database remains the same in the Material Control file.

1 To formulate a revised Pipeline Reference by stripping off the characters outside the first and last "-" delimiting character of the Pipeline Reference, removing the central "-" delimiter, and then passing the remaining character string. e.g. 6-LNG-6412A-CT15 is changed to LNG6412A in the Material Control file. Note. This is a very specific facility and will not function if the PIPELINE-REFERENCE in the Pipeline Input Data File is not in the exact form described above.

MATERIAL CONTROL -PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

ALIAS- 150 -

etails


D

SbSb

114. Specification break indication



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 114

114

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 15 - SPEC. BREAK INDICATION.

This Option Switch controls the method to be used for the indication of Specification Breaks (Specification Changes) on the isometric.Two optional methods are available :-i) Single Specification indication. Boxed message consisting of the New Specification Reference pointing to the position on the Pipeline where the change occurs.ii) Two Specification indication. Two boxed messages containing the Current and New Specification

References, positioned at the point on the Pipeline where the change occurs.

0 Default to obtain the single Specification Break indication box.

1 To obtain the dual Specification Break indication boxes.

SPECIFICATION BREAK INDICATION

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

5.0 OCT 86

ALIAS- 151 -

etails


D

SbSb

115. Tolerance - Angle offset



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 115

115

4.2 JUL 86DEV. NO. 21 - SKEW BOX CUT-OFF TOLERANCE.

This Option Switch controls how small Angular deviations detected in the Pipeline Input Data File are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted Skews being generated on the isometric.The User may define an Angular cut-off value with this switch whereby any Skew that is found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the program and hence not treated as a Skew.

0 Default for No Angular Offset Tolerance to be set.

Value Where Value is set to the required angle tolerance in 1/100 th. degree. e.g. For 0.5 degree cut-off, enter 50 .

TOLERANCE - ANGLE OFFSET

0

Zero orValue

2 1 SwitchPosition

3

ALIAS- 152 -

etails


D

SbSb

116. Tolerance - Dimension offset



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Layout

OPT - 116

116

DEV. NO. 21 - SKEW BOX CUT-OFF TOLERANCE.

0 Default for No Dimensional Offset Tolerance to be set.

Value Where Value is set to the required Dimensional Tolerance in 1/100 th. millimetre. e.g. For 1.0 mm. cut-off, enter 100 .

This Option Switch controls how small Dimensional deviations detected in the Pipeline Input Data File are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted Skews being generated on the isometric.The User may define a Dimensional cut-off value with this switch whereby any offset co-ordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the program and hence will not generate a Skew at this point.

Switch Settings

TOLERANCE - DIMENSION OFFSET

0

2 1 SwitchPosition

3

4.2 JUL 86

ALIAS- 153 -


SbSb

117. Dimension round off



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 117

117

5.2 MAR 87DEV. NO. 23 - SUPPRESSION OF DIMENSION ROUND OFF CARRY-OVER.

This Option Switch controls the "Dimension Round Off Carry-Over”function which is used to control how remainders are handled whendimensions are being calculated and output on the isometric.At Branch locations, this Option Switch permits the remainder part of adimension either to be carried over and added to the next dimension, ordiscarded.An Override carry-over option beyond current component is also available

0 Default for rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16thinch and carrying over any remainder to the next dimension.

1 For rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th inch withNo carry-over of the remainder beyond a branch intersection

2 For rounding off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th inch withNo carry-over of the remainder beyond a current component

DIMENSION ROUND OFF

0

EitherSetting

1Switch

Position

8.11.0 APR 03

ALIAS- 154 -

etails


D

SbSb

118. Dimensions - Overall



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 118

118

5.9 MAR 90DEV. NO. 36 - OVERALL DIMENSIONS TO CENTRE-LINE OF VALVES.

DEV. NO. 53 - ISOPLOT PROGRAM UPDATE.

This Option Switch controls the use of Overall Dimensions. The controllable options are whether Overall Dimension are to be plotted or not, and if they are, which type. Also controllable is the Dimension Line Stand-Out distance.Overall Dimensions to Valve Centres are only available to Valves that have a Spindle.

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

0

AllSettings

23

Blank orValue

1 SwitchPosition

This Option Switch is in two parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Overall Dimensions On /Off and Type.0 Default for No Overall Dimensions. 1 For Overall Dimensions On - going across Branches

(e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses).2 For Overall Dimensions On - stopping at Branches

(e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses).3 For Overall Dimensions On - going to Valve Centres and going across

Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses).4 For Overall Dimensions On - going to Valve Centres but stopping at

Branches (e.g. Tees, Olets and Crosses). (Continued over page)

7.0 OCT 93

ALIAS- 155 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 118

118 Contd.

(Continued from previous page) SWITCH POSITIONS 2 & 3 - Overall Dimension Standout.Blank Default for No Overall Dimension Standout to be set.

Program default will be used for all Overall Dimensions. Value Value is set to the User Specified Overall Dimension Standout

distance in whole mm's. e.g. For 22 mm. set 22.

DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

ALIAS- 156 -

etails


D

SbSb

119. Dimensions / elevations - Vertical



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 119

119

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 18 - IMPROVED DIMENSIONING.

This Option Switch controls how Vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric. These may be indicated either with normal Pipe Dimensions, in the form of vertical Co-ordinate Elevation (EL.) values, or a combination of both types.

0 Default for normal Vertical pipe Dimensions. Elevations are also indicated at intersection points when the level changes.

1 For all vertical pipe Dimensions to be suppressed and replaced by Elevations in the form of text messages at All positions where Dimensions would normally be output.

2 For vertical Dimensions And Elevations output at All normal Dimensioning positions.

DIMENSIONS / ELEVATIONS - VERTICAL

0

AllSettings

1 SwitchPosition

5.0 OCT 86

ALIAS- 157 -

etails


D

SbSb

120. Tapping - Branch scale



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 120

120

5.0 MAR 87DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY.DEV. NO. 70A - TAPS ON ‘PIPE’ COMPONENTS

This Option Switch controls the plotted size of Tapped Branches. A TappedBranch is a collection of components attached to a connection Tapping Point.This Switch is in 2 sections:i) Tapped Branches on actual Fitting Components i.e. Valves, Flanges etc.ii) Tapped Branches on ‘pipe’ Type Components i.e. Elbows, Tees, Pipe etc.The components in a Tapped Branch may be scaled up or down from thesize used for the main Pipeline.

0 Default for No Tapped Branch scaling. i.e. Tapped Branches shown the same size as the main Pipeline (100%).

Value Where Value is a number that represents an alternative Tapped Branch scaling factor. e.g. Enter 110 to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. (50% is the minimum recommended value).

TAPPING - BRANCH SCALE

Zero orValue

0

23 1 SwitchPosition


O.S. 121 O.S. 1227.14 MAR 98

45

Blank, Zeroor Value

Blank Default for Tapped Branch scaling at 65% of main Pipeline size.

SWITCH POSITION 1, 2 & 3 - Tapped Branches on Fitting Components.

SWITCH POSITION 4 & 5 - Tapped Branches on ‘Pipe’ type Components.

Value Where Value is a number that represents an alternativeTapped Branch scaling factor.e.g. Enter 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling.

ISSUE 3


121 122

ALIAS- 158 -

etails


D

SbSb

121. Tapping - Branch dimensions



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 121

121

5.2 MAR 87

0 Default for Tapped Branch Dimensions On - as set for the main Pipeline.

1 For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off.

TAPPING - BRANCH DIMENSIONS

This Option Switch controls the Dimensioning of Tapped Branches. A TappedBranch is a collection of components attached to a connection Tapping Point.This Switch is in 2 sections:i) Tapped Branches on actual Fitting Components i.e. Valves, Flanges etc.ii) Tapped Branches on ‘Pipe’ Type Components i.e. Elbows, Tees, Pipe etc.Tapped Branches may be output on the isometric in either dimensioned, un-dimensioned or partially dimensioned form.


O.S. 120 O.S. 122 7.14 MAR 98

DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY.DEV. NO. 70A - TAPS ON ‘PIPE’ COMPONENTS

SWITCH POSITION 1 - Tapped Branches on Fitting Components.

Zeroor Value

0

2 1Position

Blankor Value

2 For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off except for those on Pipe andPipe Type Components.

blank Default for Tapped Branch Dimensions Off.1 Tapped Branch Dimensions On.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Tapped Branches on ‘Pipe’ Components.

2 For Tapped Branch Dimensions Off except for those on Pipe andPipe Type Components.

ISSUE 3


120 122

ALIAS- 159 -

etails


D

SbSb

122. Tapping - Branch co-ordinates



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 122

122

5.2 MAR 87DEV. NO. 9 - FITTING TAP FACILITY.DEV.NO.73B - TANGENTIAL BRANCHCONNECTIONS

0 Default for Tapping Point connection Co-ordinates Not to beplotted.

1 For Tapping Point connection co-ordinates to be plotted.2 Tapping Point connection relative to component origin.

TAPPING - BRANCH CO-ORDINATES

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

This Option Switch controls the output of Co-ordinates at Tapped Branch connection points.(i.e. The point on the host component that the Tapped Branch is connected to).

Related Option Switches.O.S. 120 O.S. 121

8.8.0 JUN 01

2

Blankor Value

ALIAS- 160 -

etails


D

SbSb

123. Instrument ID enclosure



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse



SWITCH POSITION 1 - For Balloon type enclosures.0 Default for No Balloon around the Instrument Name. All the following values represent the number of plotted characters permitted on either line within the balloon (Maximum of two lines allowed).1 For 1 character maximum on each line.2 For 2 characters maximum on each line.3 For 3 characters maximum on each line.4 For 4 characters maximum on each line.5 For 5 characters maximum on each line.Note. A two line Name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the

Name at the point a new-line is required. (Continued overpage).

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 123

123

1.0 APR 83DEV. NO. 10 - INSTRUMENT BALLOON FACILITY.

VERSION 7 - RELEASE NOTES.

This Switch controls the plotting of Instrument Name enclosures which may be Balloons, a variety of other box type enclosures, or no enclosure.In the case of Balloon type enclosures, when switched On, the Balloon diameter is always generated at a size that will enclose the maximum number of characters set in the Option Switch.

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

5.2 MAR 87

0

23 1 SwitchPosition

Zero orValue

Blank orValue

Unused

7.0 OCT 93

ALIAS- 161 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


(Continued from previous page).SWITCH POSITION 2 - Currently Unused.

SWITCH POSITION 3 - For Box type enclosures.Blank Default for No Enclosure Box around the Instrument Name.1 Diamond ended box enclosure.2 Round ended box enclosure.3 Triangle shaped box enclosure (2 characters maximum). *4 Diamond shaped box enclosure (3 characters maximum). *5 Square ended box enclosure.* Because these two enclosures cannot be elongated there is a limit on the number of characters that can be accommodated.Notes. i) When using any of the Box type enclosures, Switch Position 1 must be set to zero. ii) A two line Name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the Name at the point a new-line is required.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 123

123 Contd.INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

ALIAS- 162 -

etails


D

SbSb

124. Flange rotation angles



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 124

124FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES

This Switch controls the output of Flange Rotation Angles that are used by the Fabricator when welding on Flanges that have to be rotated away from the normal off centres axes.Although the facility may be used on all types of isometrics, it is of particularly benefit on Spool Isometrics.When the facility is switched on there are a variety of enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of Flange Rotation Angles on the isometric.

7.1 JUN 94


SWITCH POSITION 1 - Flange Rotation Angles plotted or not.0 Default for No Flange Rotation Angles. 1 For Flange Rotation Angles to be output.

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Enclosure Box type.Blank Default for Un-Boxed Angle output.1 For Diamond ended enclosure box.2 For Round ended enclosure box.3 For Square ended enclosure box.

EitherSetting

12 SwitchPosition

Blank orValue

DEV. NO. 63(B) - FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES.

ALIAS- 163 -


SbSb

125. Reserved



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 125

125RESERVED

ALIAS- 164 -


SbSb

126. Reserved



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 126

126RESERVED

ALIAS- 165 -

etails


D

SbSb

127. Isogen version / run date



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Switch controls the optional plotting of the ISOGEN Program Version Banner together with the Run Date and generation time of the isometric.When switched On, this information is plotted on a single line located at the bottom Left Hand corner of the isometric, but inside any Cut Marks that may be present.Alternatively, the Banner may be located just below the bottom outer line of the Drawing Frame.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 127

127

1.0 APR 83NONE

0 Default for the Banner Not to be plotted.

1 Banner to be plotted.

2 Special value for Alias Ltd laserprinter. (Moves the Banner inwards from the edge of the plot to prevent the printer from 'clipping' the message).

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

ISOGEN VERSION / RUN DATE

ALIAS- 166 -

etails


D

SbSb

128. Fab friendly isometrics



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


This Option Switch is in 3 parts. SWITCH POSITION 1 - Type of Weld inserted at FFI Break Point.0 Default for Site Weld (SKEY = WS).1 For User defined choice - A Pop Up Menu will be displayed for

the User to select the Weld choice (or No Weld).

SWITCH POSITION 2 - Controls which FFI the generated Gaskets & Bolts should be associated with when an FFI Split

occurs at a Flanged connection.Blank Default for program to always attach the Gaskets & Bolts to

a detected flange. On a pair of Flanges, this will be the First Flange.

1 For User defined choice at most Flange positions. (Where a Flange is positioned at the 'End' of Pipeline or Branch then No choice is necessary).


This Switch controls three FFI conditions :-1) The Weld Type automatically inserted at Break Points between FFI's.2) Which FFI Gaskets & Bolts should be associated with when an FFI Split occurs at a Flanged connection.3) FFW Cutting Allowance association - to which side of a FFW which is located in Pipe should any Allowance be added to.

Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 128

128FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS ( FFI )

0

23 1 SwitchPosition

Zero orone

Zero, blank or one

Blank or one

7.3 SEP 95

ISSUE 2

ALIAS- 167 -

etails


D

SbSb



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 128

FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS ( FFI )


SWITCH POSITION 3 - FFW Cutting Allowance Association.0 Default to have any Allowance added to the First piece of pipe found

in the Piping Data File sequence.

1 For User defined choice of nominating which side of an FFW is to carry any Allowance. (Once this option is selected the choice will have to be made at all FFW's in the Pipe).

128 Contd.

ALIAS- 168 -

etails


D

SbSb

129. Interactive editing



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 129

129INTERACTIVE EDITING

This Option Switch activates the use of the Interactive Editing function within the SPOOLGEN system which is used to add supplementary information to Pipeline Input Data Files.Note. This option only operates on PC versions of ISOGEN running under the control of the SPOOLGEN system.

0 Default for the Interactive Editing System not to be activated.

1 To run the Interactive Editing System.

SPOOL DEFINITION SYSTEM. 7.1 JUN 94

0

EitherSetting

1 SwitchPosition

ALIAS- 169 -


SbSb

130. Development testing



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 130

130

1.0 APR 83NONE

This Option Switch is a special one that is reserved for use only by the ISOGEN Administration Team for development and testing purposes.Users must leave the setting at the default value of zero (0).

DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 170 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 131

131

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 171 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 132

132

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 172 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 133

133

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 173 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 134

134

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 174 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 135

135

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 175 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 136

136

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 176 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 137

137

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 177 -


SbSb

138. Plotfile - DGN link and ASCII text



Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 138

138

6.0 MAR 91

This Option Switch controls two functions related to the generation of DGN format isometric output files.On platforms that support the generation of DGN files, this Option Switch controls the creation of a link file between the ISOGEN system and the DGN software.An additional option allows the User to select ASCII Text characters (as an alternative to Vector text) for use within the DGN file.

PLOTFILE - DGN LINKPLOTFILE - ASCII TEXT

This Option Switch is in three parts.SWITCH POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3 - Currently Unused.0 Must always be set to zero.SWITCH POSITION 4 - Generation of ASCII characters in DGN file.0 or blank For default of Vector Text characters.1 For generation of ASCII characters.SWITCH POSITION 5 - Generation of DGN format output files.0 or blank For generation of normal plotfiles as nominated in Option

Switch 71.1 For generation of DGN format output files.

Option Switch 71 must be set to a value of 6.

1

023 Switch

Position

ZeroBlank orone


O.S. 71

45

Zero Blank or one

71

ALIAS- 178 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 139

139

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 179 -


SbSb




Options

Version Date

FirstIntroduced

ExtendedUse


Description

Switch Settings

Switch Layout

OPT - 140

140

1.0 APR 83NONE


DEVELOPMENT TESTING

ALIAS- 180 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Plotfile length

ALIAS

O.S. 1

This Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plot roll ratherthan single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple isometrics ineach plotfile like that shown above.

(It is not effective if OS 31=1 - when each plotfile will contain only a singleisometric - and hence is not used when single DXF or DGN plotfiles areproduced for importing into a 2D graphics system like AutoCAD orMicroStation - when the isometrics are usually sent to a laser printer forplotting).

Note. Some older plotters (like Benson Electrostatic) used to have amaximum plotfile length of 3275 mm which is the default value.Other similar plotters use a different maximum length value.

Under these settings the program considers the physical drawing sizeand stacking arrangement - and will output the maximum number ofisometrics it can into each plotfile produced.For example, if 20 isometrics were produced, you could get 3 plotfiles -two with 8 isometrics each in them - and one with 4 isometrics.

e.g. 3275 mm

Maximum Plotfile Length

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

PLOTFILE LENGTH

ALIAS- 181 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Cut piece numbering / list type

ALIAS

O.S. 2CUT PIECE NUMBERING / LIST TYPE

Cut Piece identifiers are enclosed in brackets like this <1>

The identifiers may be :-Number based - like this <1> (OS 2 Pos. 3 = 0).or Alpha based - <A> (OS 2 Pos. 3 = 1).

This is the New Style Cut Piece List(OS 2 Pos. 2 = 1)- the Old Style is no longerrecommended.

This example showsNumeric Identifiers

<4>

<3>

<2>

<1>

ALIAS- 182 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing trim marks

ALIAS

O.S. 3DRAWING TRIM MARKS

Like OS1 - the facility provided by this Option Switch is reallyonly beneficial on plotters that use a plot roll rather than singlesheets.Drawing Trim Marks are plotted at the extremities of eachisometric drawing - the distance away from the frame being themargin settings.Trimming to the marks provides the exact drawing size.

N

N

N

N

N

N

Drawing Width

Dra

win

g H

eigh

t

Drawing TrimMarks

ALIAS- 183 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing text size

ALIAS

O.S. 4DRAWING TEXT SIZE

Controls the text size for all generated charactersin this region of the isometric.

SMALL CHARACTERS - 2.1 MMMEDIUM CHARACTERS - 2.4 MMLARGE CHARACTERS - 2.8 MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 3.5 MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.2MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.9MM

ALIAS- 184 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Co-ordinates: Connection/connectivity

ALIAS

O.S. 5CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY

POS 2 = 0 POS 2 = 1

POS 1 = 0 POS 1 =1

POS 3 = 0 POS 3 = 1

This text is onATEXT -240

This text is onATEXT -240

1 OF 3

ALIAS- 185 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S 5CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY

POS 5 = 0 POS 5 = 1

POS 4 = 0 POS4 =1

POS 6 = 0 POS 6 = 1 2 OF 3

Text is onATEXT -241


ALIAS- 186 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 5CO-ORDINATES - CONNECTION/ CONNECTIVITY

POS 7 = 0 POS 7 =1

3 OF 3



POS 8 = 0 POS 8 =1

Text comesfrom the -47recordText comes

from the -47record

ALIAS- 187 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Date output

ALIAS

O.S. 6DATE OUTPUT

▼The word DATE is in ATEXT -250

▼Month names are in ATEXT's -258 to -269

▼Use the ISOGEN -14 record to position the Date with TEXTPOS(Text Positioning).

Date formatsBritish 28 MAR 96 - OS 6 = 0European28/03/96 - OS 6 = 1American03/28/96 - OS 6 = 2No Date output on Iso - OS 6 = 3

British 21 APR 96 - OS 6 =10European21/04/96 - OS 6 = 11American04/21/96 - OS 6 = 12

Thesesettings use

theDate entry in

thePiping Data

File(IDF or PCF)

..........................28/03/96........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Thesesettings get

the Dateentry from

yourcomputer on

the day ofprocessing

ALIAS- 188 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipeline splitting: User control

ALIAS

O.S. 7PIPELINE SPLITTING - USER CONTROL

N

3/3

N

2/3

N

1/3

Set OS 7 = 0 for automaticdrawing splitting

(this is the normal setting)

- the amount of information oneach DRG is controlled

by the program but may beincreased or decreased by use

of OS 38

N

2/2

N

1/2

Alternatively - to overrideautomatic splitting - set the

Switch value to required numberof DRG's

e.g. For 2 DRG's set OS 7 = 2

Warning ! A dictated number of DRG's would only be set for asingle nominated pipeline - on completion of which the value shouldbe reset to 0

ALIAS- 189 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimension line standout

ALIAS

O.S. 8DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

Layer 2STRING /COMPOSITE

Layer 1MESSAGES / SUPPORTS

Layer 3OVERALL

Dimension Standout Distance varieswith the character text size -

Small text -OS 4 = 1Layer 1 - 6 mmLayer 2 - 12 mmLayer 3 - 18 mm

Large text -OS 4 = 2Layer 1 - 8 mmLayer 2 - 16 mmLayer 3 - 24 mm

Medium text -OS 4 =0Layer 1 - 7 mmLayer 2 - 14 mmLayer 3 - 21 mm

Extra Large text -OS 4 = 3Layer 1 - 9 mmLayer 2 - 18 mmLayer 3 - 27 mm

Extra Large text -OS 4 = 5Layer 1 - 11 mmLayer 2 - 22 mmLayer 3 - 33 mm

Extra Large text -OS 4 =4Layer 1 - 10 mmLayer 2 - 20 mmLayer 3 - 30 mm

ALIAS- 190 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimension form

ALIAS

O.S. 9DIMENSION FORM

String DimensionsOS 9 Pos. 1 = 0

Composite DimensionsOS 9 Pos. 1 = 3

1 of 3

ALIAS- 191 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


2 of 3

String, Support / Message &Reference Dimensions all ONOS 9 Pos. 1 = 0

ReferenceDimension

MessageDimension

String & Support / MessageDimensions Suppressed.Only Reference Dimensions ONOS 9 Pos. 1 = 1

String Dimensions Suppressed.Support / Message & ReferenceDimensions ONOS 9 Pos. 1 = 2

ALIAS- 192 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


Full String DimensionsOS 9 Pos. 1 = 4

3 of 3

American style Dimensions.(Dimension on top of line).OS 9 Pos. 3 = 1

Gasket Dimensioning.(Gaskets here are 2 mm thick)

OS 9 Pos. 2 = 0(Gasket thickness

not included)

OS 9 Pos. 2 =1(Gasket thickness

is included)

ALIAS- 193 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing margins

ALIAS

O.S. 10, 11, 12, 13DRAWING MARGINS

N

Paper Sizee.g. A2 , ANSI 'C’ size, etc.

Left

OS 10

Right

OS 11

TopOS 12

BottomOS 13

Drawing Frame

Note.These Margins must be set when using either :-

▼The standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame or

▼A User Defined Drawing Frame

Also - a large side margin (left or right) must be set to suit the width of aStyle 3 or 4 BOM.

ALIAS- 194 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing size: Postscript plotter size

ALIAS

O.S. 14DRAWING SIZE - STANDARD& POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER SIZE

N

Standard Paper Sizee.g. A2, ANSI 'C' size, etc.

This OS sets standard Drawing sizes - All the European 'A' seriespaper sizes or the American ANSI sizes ('A' to 'E').(For non-standard Drawing sizes - use OS 15 & 16).

Switch Positions 3 & 4 permits 'direct' PostScript files to be plotted at areduced scale.

Apparent size to ISOGEN - A2 Actual plotted size - A3

N

N

Note. This effect can also be achieved by plotting out of a2D

graphics system - like AutoCAD or MicroStation.

ALIAS- 195 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing size: Height and width

ALIAS

O.S. 15, 16DRAWING SIZE - HEIGHT & WIDTH

N

This OS sets non-standard Drawing sizes .

e.g. For a Drawing 300 mm High X 400 mm WideSet OS 15 = 300 & OS 16 = 400

(For standard Drawing sizes - use OS 14).

Width

Height

Notes.Any settings in these two Option Switches causes any setting in OS14 Pos. 1 & 2 to be ignored.▼However, any setting in OS 14 Pos. 3 & 4 will not be ignored. Thismeans 'direct' PostScript files of a non-standard Drawing size mayproduced at a reduced scale - in the same way that standardDrawings can be.

ALIAS- 196 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Flow Arrows: On components

ALIAS

O.S. 17FLOW ARROWS - ON COMPONENTS

The arrow direction (and hence fluid flow or gas flow direction)is controlled from the 3D Design System.

When called for by setting OS 17 = 0 - most normal in-line componentswill have this Flow Arrow plotted alongside.

Note that there is an alternative type of Flow Arrow to this one.See OS 112 for details of a Flow Arrow that is plotted directly on the

Pipe.

It is normal to use only one of the available Flow Arrows.Most Users now prefer the one controlled from OS 112.

ALIAS- 197 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing frame: Program standard

ALIAS

O.S. 18DRAWING FRAME - PROGRAM STANDARD

This OS allows you to switch the standard ISOGEN Drawing Frame ON orOFF.

Drawing FrameON

OS 18 = 0

This is the default

Drawing Frame OFF

OS 18 = 1

N

4-AR-4000

The standard Drawing Frame is always switched OFF whenyou are employing a User Defined Backing Frame.

For full details of the techniques used in making User Defined BackingFrames - see the Training Slide that covers all aspects of that facility.

N

4-AR-4000

ALIAS- 198 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Sloping pipeline indication method

ALIAS

O.S. 19SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION METHOD

This is how Falling Pipelines are indicated.

The default setting of value zero shows the Falls angle inDegrees like that above.

Values of 1 to 5 show the Fall expressed in alternative ways.

A Value of 6 suppresses the Fall indication altogether- like this

ALIAS- 199 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Sloping pipeline indication limit

ALIAS

O.S. 20SLOPING PIPELINE INDICATION LIMIT

This Option Switch works in conjunction with OS 19.

It sets the cut-off value that determines what steepness ofslope should be shown as a Fall - and what should not.

Referring to the example on slide OS 19 - if the cut-off value for thatpipeline was set to 4° (it was set to 6°) then the slope would be shown

like this.

This is because the actual slope is now steeper than the cut-off value.

ALIAS- 200 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Isometric type

ALIAS

O.S. 21ISOMETRIC TYPE

OS 21 = 0Combined isometric - A Full size iso containing Erector andFabricator information

Fab materials

Erection materials

1 OF 7

ALIAS- 201 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 21 = 1Erection / Offshore isometric - A Full size iso containing onlyErector Information

2 OF 7

Erection or Offshore materials only

ALIAS- 202 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 21 = 2Fabrication isometric - A Full size iso containing only FabricationInformation

3 OF 7

Fab materials only

ALIAS- 203 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 21 = 6Spool isometric - Smaller size isos containing only single pipespools - with 'as-built' orientation

4 OF 7

ALIAS- 204 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 21 = 4Spool isometric - Smaller size isos containing only single pipe spools -with 'flat' orientation

5 OF 7

ALIAS- 205 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


6 OF 7

OS 21 = 10A special type of isometric which has no pipeline graphics.

The drawing region is left blank for the pipeline isometric to beadded - either manually or with a 2D draughting system.

ALIAS- 206 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


7 OF 7

OS 21 =100A special Test isometric. This example is Combined isometric

On a test isometric all numericvalues are substituted with a stringof XXXX characters like this

ALIAS- 207 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Cut piece add-on allowances

ALIAS

O.S. 22CUT PIECE ADD-ON ALLOWANCES

Nominal position of Loose flange

Added on length of cutpipe (e.g. 175 mm) - toallow for adjustment of

pipe on site beforewelding on flange

Normal cut length

Increased cut length

Nominal PositionofField Fit Weld

1) Loose Flange

2) FFW

Actualposition

Normal cut length


Actualposition

Normal cut length


3) Shop Test Weld

Nozzle

ALIAS- 208 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Controls and file type

ALIAS

O.S. 23MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

1 of 9

OS 23 = 100 - Style 1 Material ListThis is the Standard BOM - it has fixed content and layoutIt does not require an MLD control file

ALIAS- 209 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 23 = 110 - Special Type Material ListUsed by Siemens - is a variation on Style 1Does not require an MLD control file

'B' Pre-fix onfield welds

Separatematerialentries

'U' Pre-fixeson Bends

2 of 9

ALIAS- 210 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 23

OS 23 = 200 - Style 2 Material ListHas the overall appearance of a Style 1 but this of Style ofBOM has User defined content and layoutRequires an MLD control file

3 of 9

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

ALIAS- 211 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 23

23

MATERIAL LIST - CONTROLS & M/C FILE TYPE

OS 23 = 220 - Style 2 Material ListSame as the previous example except here, Alphabetic pointers areusedRequires an MLD control file

4 of 9

ALIAS- 212 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 23 = 300 - Style 3 Material ListUses a completely different concept to Style 1 or 2 - this type isplotted onto a User defined backing sheet where each BOM entry ispositioned at a specific X-Y co-ordinate positionRequires an MLD control file containing basic X-Y co-ordinatedetailsFor further information - see the Material List slides

5 of 9

ALIAS- 213 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 23 = 400 - Style 4 Material ListSame concept as Style 3 but this one also shows material usage foreach SpoolLike the Style 3 - requires an MLD control file containing basic X-Yco-ordinate details

Spool Information

All materials exceptGaskets & Bolts haveunique suffix type ID

numbers e.g. thiselbow is partnumber 6.4

6 of 9

ALIAS- 214 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 23 = 10200 - Another type of Style 2 Material ListHere, there are no sub-headings and the BOM is partitioned intogroupsRequires an MLD control file

3 of 37 of 9

ALIAS- 215 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


-6 6"-ASC-6900-14 02/08/96-8 1-9 P-5000-10 AR-102-11 CS-150-12 150#-14 01/03/96-17 PNT-23-19 200C50 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 060 120 96 146 64 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0100 96 0 0 149 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-20 PAW-40100 64 0 0 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-20 PAW-40200 96 96 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3-20 TAMF-6X6200 96 64 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4-20 RAM-E40FF-6X4200 96 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5-20 EAM-90L40300 96 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6-20 FAM-150WN40300 64 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7-20 FAM-150WN40400 96 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-20 JFA-150R2400 64 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-20 JFA-150R2500 12 0 0 8 2 85 0 0 0 0 0 0 10-20 BAA-3/4X85500 10 0 0 16 2 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-20 BAA-5/8X75

OS 23 Position 4 = 0 - Showing Standard Material Control FileoutputThis can be loaded into the Users Material Control SystemThis is the old original type containing fixed, non-User definedinformation

8 of 9

ALIAS- 216 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


PIPELINE DRG ITEM MAIN SECREF NO CODE BORE BORE QTY

-------- --- ---- ---- ---- ---6"-ASC-6900 1 PAW-40 6 6 14.863 M6"-ASC-6900 1 PAW-40 4 4 0.674 M6"-ASC-6900 1 TAMF-6X6 6 6 16"-ASC-6900 1 RAM-E40FF-6X4 6 4 26"-ASC-6900 1 EAM-90L40 6 6 36"-ASC-6900 1 FAM-150WN40 6 6 16"-ASC-6900 1 FAM-150WN40 4 4 26"-ASC-6900 1 JFA-150R2 6 6 16"-ASC-6900 1 JFA-150R2 4 4 26"-ASC-6900 1 BAA-3/4X85 3/4 3/4 86"-ASC-6900 1 BAA-5/8X75 5/8 5/8 16

OS 23 Position 4 = 1 - Showing User Defined Material ControlFile outputThis type permits variable content and layoutIt requires an MLD FileThis can also be loaded into the Users Material Control System

9 of 9

ALIAS- 217 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Pipeline/drawing

O.S. 24MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

OS 24 Position 1 controls whether Material Lists are produced by :-▼ Drawing - OS 24 Pos 1 = 0▼ Pipeline - OS 24 Pos 1 = 1▼ Drawing (spool iso material part numbers will match full isomaterial part numbers) - OS 24 Pos 1 = 2

▼ Pipeline (spool iso material list numbers will match full isomaterial list numbers) - OS 24 Pos 1 = 3

However, this is only relevant on Split isos having more than 1 drawing

1 OF 3

Case 1) OS 24 Pos 1 = 0 - Material List by DrawingOS 24 Pos 1 = 3 - Material list by Drawing (appears in thisform on both full and spool isos, all part numbers match)

DRG 1/2 DRG 2/2

These are individual Drawing totals

ALIAS- 218 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 24

These aregrouped up totals- for the completepipeline

DRG 1/2 DRG 2/2(BOM area is blank)

Case 2) OS 24 Pos 1 = 1 - Material List by PipelineOS 24 Pos 1 = 3 - Material list by Pipeline (appears in thisform on both full and spool isos, all part numbers match)

2 OF 3

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

ALIAS- 219 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 24

OS 24 Position 2 controls the way Pipe Lengths are reported onthe BOM

There are 3 styles each for Metric and Imperial lengths

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = Blank

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = 1

Metric - OS 24 Pos 2 = 2

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = Blank

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = 1

Imperial - OS 24 Pos 2 = 2

3 OF 3

MATERIAL LIST - PIPELINE / DRAWING

ALIAS- 220 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list position

O.S. 25MATERIAL LIST - POSITION

OS 25 Position 1 controls the location of where the BOM is plotted- on the Left Hand or Right Hand side of the isometric

This only affects Styles 1 & 2 Material Lists, not Style 3 & 4

OS 25 Pos 1 = 0BOM on LH side

OS 25 Pos 1 = 1BOM on RH side

1 of 4

ALIAS- 221 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 25TITLE BLOCK - POSITION

2 of 4

OS 25 Position 2 controls where the Title Block is printedrelative to the BOMIt may be :-

▼In the default position at the bottom RH corner▼Printed at the bottom of the BOM▼Suppressed completely

OS 25 Position 2 = blankTitle Block in default position

ALIAS- 222 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


3 of 4

OS 25 Position 2 = 1Title Block at bottom of BOM

ALIAS- 223 -

turn tot sheet

Refron


4 of 4

OS 25 Position 2 = 2Title Block suppressed

ALIAS- 224 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Descriptions

ALIAS

O.S. 26MATERIAL LIST - DESCRIPTIONS

Switch Position 1 to suppress Item Descriptions only applies toStyle 1 BOM as this function is controlled from the MLD for all otherStyles (2, 3 and 4)

Example 1 - Style 1 BOM with OS 26 = 0

Example 2 - Style 1 BOM with OS 26 = 11

No Descriptions

No Blank Linesbetween entries

ALIAS- 225 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Text size

ALIAS

O.S. 27MATERIAL LIST - TEXT SIZE

Controls the text size for all generated charactersin this region of the isometric.

SMALL CHARACTERS - 2.1 MMMEDIUM CHARACTERS - 2.4 MMLARGE CHARACTERS - 2.8 MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 3.5 MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.2MMEXTRA LARGE CHARACTERS - 4.9MM

ALIAS- 226 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Item code length

ALIAS

O.S. 28MATERIAL LIST - ITEM CODE LENGTH

The longest Item Code on this the project for this example is13 characters. Hence, OS 26 should be set to 13.

ALIAS- 227 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Line spacing

ALIAS

O.S. 29MATERIAL LIST - LINE SPACING

100% 90%

Full length BOM listOS 29 = 0 or 100

Shorter BOM listOS 29 = 90

The BOM listing can be made to look shorter or longer by changing the Line Spacing

ALIAS- 228 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Continuation method

ALIAS

O.S. 30MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD

N

LSS250

Case 1 - OS 30 = 0

Case 2 - OS 30 = 1

N

LSS250

N

LSS250

1/2

2/2

1 OF 2

BOM overflowonto Dummy'2 OF 2' sheet

BOM Overflowonto second

Material List area

ALIAS- 229 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 30MATERIAL LIST - CONTINUATION METHOD

Case 3 - OS 30 = 2

Case 4 - OS 30 = 10

Single sheetisometric called 1/1

N

LSS250

N

LSS250 1/1

1A

BOM overflowonto Dummy '1A' sheet

N

MSS150 1/1

2 OF 2

ALIAS- 230 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing output: File/screen

ALIAS

O.S. 31DRAWING OUTPUT - FILE / SCREEN

OS 31 = 0(and OS 1 =3275)

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N N N N

Iso 1 Iso 2 Iso 3 Iso 4

OS 31 = 1

Each isometric produced in a separate plotfile

(Used when plotfiles are DXF or DGN for loadinginto a 2D graphics system or when plotfiles are

going straight to a laser printer)

Multiple isometrics all in one plotfile

(Most economic method when plotfilesare going straight to a paper roll type plotter)

N

OS 31 = 2

Isometrics sent to the screen (Does not work on PC)

ALIAS- 231 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing output: Scaling

ALIAS

O.S. 32DRAWING OUTPUT - SCALING

N

CWS100

N

CWS100

OS 32 = 0 or 100 (Default)

Full size isometrics

OS 32 = 71(71% of nominated Drawingsize)

Reduced size isometrics

Notes1) With this Option Switch the whole of the isometric (frame andinner contents) is re-scaled2) If you are using a 2D graphics system such as AutoCAD and youwant to produce scaled down isometrics (e.g. effectively A2 size - butscaled down to A3 on output) then that reduction should be done in thegraphics system, not with this Option Switch

ALIAS- 232 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing output: Picture scale

ALIAS

O.S. 34DRAWING OUTPUT - PICTURE SCALE

N

CWS100

OS 34 = 0or 100 (Default)

Normal picture scale

OS 34 = 150(150% of nominatedDrawing size)

Increased picture scale

N

CWS100

Unlike OS 32 - this Option Switch only affects the picture part of theisometric. Everything else remains the same size.

ALIAS- 233 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing: Reserved areas

ALIAS

O.S. 35DRAWING - RESERVED AREAS

Reserved Area distancefor Drawing Region

Reserved Area distancefor Material List

Reserved Area is actually a distance setting which must always be inmm's - even if you are an Imperial Units User

ALIAS- 234 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing output: Stacking value

ALIAS

O.S. 36DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING VALUE

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N N N N

Single stackingOS 36 = 0 or 1

Double stackingOS 36 = 2

Like OS 1 - this Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plotroll rather than single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple

isometrics in each plotfile like that shown above.

ALIAS- 235 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing output: Stacking orientation

ALIAS

O.S. 37DRAWING OUTPUT - STACKING ORIENTATION

Across the plot rollOS 37 = 1

N N N N

N N N N N N

Again, this Option Switch only operates on plotters that use a plot rollrather than single sheets - and where OS 31 = 0 to obtain multiple

isometrics in each plotfile like that shown above.

Along the plot rollOS 37 = 0

ALIAS- 236 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipeline splitting: Automatic

O.S. 38PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC

N

WS150 DRG 1/2

N

WS150 DRG 2/2

1 OF 2

Here, OS 38 is set to the default value 0 (or 100).The result is two drawings - each with approximately

the same amount of information

Example of Pipeline Splitting.

ALIAS- 237 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 38PIPELINE SPLITTING - AUTOMATIC

2 OF 2

N

WS150 DRG 1/1

By setting OS 38 to value 120 - more information willbe forced onto each drawing.

This results in only a single drawing being produced.

Note that care should be taken when specifying values > 100 . Inthis respect the User takes full responsibility for the output results !

ALIAS- 238 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Spool piece identifiers

O.S. 39SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

These are the two automatic Spool Piece Identifier types

OS 39 = 0Numeric System

OS 39 =2Alphabetic System

1 OF 3

1

[ A ]

[ B ]

[ C ]

[ D ]

2

ALIAS- 239 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 39SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

2 OF 3

This is how User Defined Spool Identifiers look :-

3

SPL A

359

1414"NS

OS 39 = 0

These Identifiers mayeither be entered in the

model by the 3D Designer- or probed in using

SPOOLGEN

ALIAS- 240 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 39

10

These are alternative enclose types - controlled by OS 39 position 3

SPOOL PIECE IDENTIFIERS

3 OF 3

1

1

10

10

OS 39 Pos 3 = 1

OS 39 Pos 3 = 2

OS 39 Pos 3 = 3

OS 39 Pos 3 = 4

OS 39 Pos 3 = 5

SPL A

SPL A

SPL A

The are all obtainable with either Automatic or User DefinedSpool Identifiers

OS 39 position 4 controls how Spool Drawings are identified

6"-ASC-6000 SPL ASPL A

OS 39 Pos 4 = 0 OS 39 Pos 4 = 1

4

5

ALIAS- 241 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipe supports

ALIAS

O.S. 40PIPE SUPPORTS

1 OF 3

OS 40 = 0String Dimensions for Pipe Supports

OS 40 = 1Overall Dimensions for Pipe Supports

ALIAS- 242 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


2 OF 3

OS 40 = 2Pipe Supports Suppressed

OS 40 = 3Pipe Supports drawn but Un-dimensioned

ALIAS- 243 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


3 OF 3

OS 40 = 10Pipe Support Dimensions on Opposite Side

OS 40 = 2500Pipe Support Standout Distance = 25 mm

(Which forces the Standout outside the normal dimension)

ALIAS- 244 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Bore/dimension/weight control

ALIAS

O.S. 41BORE / DIMENSION / WEIGHT CONTROL

1 OF 4

OS 41 = 0 - Mixed Units

OS 41 = 1 - Imperial Units4"NS

1' 7.11/16"

E 147 ' 7.9/16"N 738 ' 2.1/4"EL +114 ' 9.5/16

4"NS

500

E 44998N 225000EL +35000

OS 41 = 2 - Metric Units100NS

500

E 44998N 225000EL +35000

ALIAS- 245 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 41 Pos 2 = 1Metric Co-Ordinatesoutput in M.mmm format

4"NS

500

E 44.998MN 225.500MEL +35.000M

2 OF 4

OS 41 Pos 3 - Feet & Inch output format - including StackedFractions

See the Options & AText Manual for details - no furtherexample is needed here

Note that Stacked Fractions only apply to Imperial Dimensionsand currently, only operate on MicroStation DGN drawings

using a special font

ALIAS- 246 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


3 OF 4

OS 41 Pos 4 = 1Weights output in KGS

format

OS 41 Pos 5 = 1Component Weights arelisted as Total Weights

OS 41 Pos 4 & 5 - Weight Information Output

OS 41 Pos 4 = 1Weights output in KGS

format

OS 41 Pos 5 = 2Component Weights are

listed as IndividualWeights

Total Component Weights

Individual Component Weights

Note that this Option Switch is used to control the output of basiccomponent Weights. More extensive Weight functionality - includingPipe Full, Weights of Insulation, and C of G calculations - arecontrolled by OS 82

ALIAS- 247 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


4 OF 4

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 = 0 or Blank

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 - Imperial Dimensions Output Format

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7 = 12

OS 41 Pos 8 - Bore Suppression at Tees / Olets and Reducers

OS 41 Pos 8 = 0 or BlankBore information plotted

OS 41 Pos 8 = 1Bore information not plotted

ALIAS- 248 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Drawing viewpoint

ALIAS

O.S. 42DRAWING VIEWPOINT

OS 42 = 0 (or 3) OS 42 = 7

OS 42 = 1 OS 42 = 5

1 OF 2

ALIAS- 249 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 42DRAWING VIEWPOINT

2 OF 2

OS 42 = 2 OS 42 = 6

OS 42 = 4 OS 42 = 8

ALIAS- 250 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipe wastage factor: areas 1 to 9

ALIAS

O.S. 43-51PIPE WASTAGE FACTOR - AREAS 1 TO 9

The Isogen Pipe Wastage facility permits you (optionally) to allowextra tube material to be provided to allow for wastage during spool

fabrication.When the facility is used, the Pipe length entries on the Material

List are increased by a User defined amount._______________________

There are two parts to the Pipe Wastage facility :-_______________________

1) The Basic Pipe Wastage Allowance is set by the User in thePiping Model on a Plant Area number basis. This value is

expressed in terms of a percentage Wastage Factor - e.g. 10% -and is extracted and held at pipe component level in the Piping

Data File.Note that this basic Pipe Wastage Allowance actually operates

independently of any settings in Option Switches 43 - 51.E.G. For a nominal tube length entry of 1000 mm which has a 10%

Wastage Factor set in the Piping Model - the actual Material Listentry would be 1000 + 10% = 1100

Note that if the Pipe Wastage Allowance is set in the Piping DataFile to zero - then setting OS 43-51 will have no effect

(because 0 X any value = 0)_______________________

2) Any such basic Pipe Wastage Factor set in the Piping Modelmay then be (optionally) overridden and increased (Note. never

decreased) by the Isogen User through the use of Option Switches43 to 51.

E.G. For the example given in 1) above, if the pipe there was inPlant Area 2 and the Wastage Allowance needed to be increased

to 20% - then Option Switch 44 would be set to 2._______________________

ALIAS- 251 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Equipment trim drawings

ALIAS

O.S. 52EQUIPMENT TRIM DRAWINGS

Equipment Trim isometrics are special types of drawings whereIsogen produces a document having a BOM, an outline frame and

a large empty area.

In this example the materials connected to each nozzle are groupedup and listed separately - as shown below - this type of listing is

produced by setting OS 52 Pos 1 = 0

The drawing part shown in greenis produced in a 2D drawing system(like AutoCAD or MicroStation) and

is then superimposed onto the emptyarea of the Isogen isometric to form a

complete picture

ALIAS- 252 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Weld numbering

ALIAS

O.S. 53WELD NUMBERING

1 OF 4

OS 53 = 1Small Size Weld Numbers

OS 53 = 2Medium Size Weld Numbers

OS 53 = 3Large Size Weld Numbers

ALIAS- 253 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


2 OF 4

OS 53 = 8Erection Welds only numbered - Medium Size

2

OS 53 = 6Fab Welds only numbered - Medium Size

ALIAS- 254 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


3 OF 4

This is a User Defined Weld Summary Box.

It is generated by setting OS 53 Pos 2 = 1 and calling in a WeldDefinition File (WDF).

(For details of the WDF see the separate Welding slides).

Note that there is another type of Weld Summary Box - one thatdoes not require a WDF. However that type is not User Defined - ithas a fixed content and layout. Although it is generated simply by

setting OS 53 Pos 2 = 1 - it is no longer in common use.

ALIAS- 255 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 53

Example where Fabricationand Erection Welds use their own

Weld Numbering Sequence - OS 53Pos 5 = 1

Note that in this case individualenclosures and Weld Number

Prefixes are recommended - asshown here.

WELD NUMBERING

4 OF 4

For details of OS 53 Positions 3 & 4 - see the front sheets - nofurther explanation is needed here.

OS 53 Pos 5 Controls Weld Numbering Sequence. For example, ifyou want Fabrication Welds and Erection Welds to have their own

Weld Numbering Sequence - set OS 53 Pos 5 = 1

Example where Fabricationand Erection Welds use the

same Weld NumberingSequence - OS 53 Pos 5 =

blank

SH1SH2

SH4

SH3

ER2

ER3

ER1

ALIAS- 256 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Weld plotting

ALIAS

O.S. 54WELD PLOTTING

1 OF 2

OS 54 = 1 - All Welds suppressed.

OS 54 = 2 - Only Site Welds plotted

OS 54 = 3 - Only Fab Welds plotted

ALIAS- 257 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 54WELD PLOTTING

2 OF 2

In this example all the materials are designated Erection - this causesall the Welds to automatically become Erection Welds as shown here

OS 54 = 0

OS 54 = 4

Changing to OS 54 = 4 causes all the Erection Welds to be changedso they look like Fabrication Welds

(Note that in doing this - the type of weld numbers generatedare change also)

ALIAS- 258 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Program messages: Run information

ALIAS

O.S. 55PROGRAM MESSAGES - RUN INFORMATION

ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7

THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE D:\P-STDMIX\FULLISO\DXFOUT\FUL001.DXF DRG. 1 /6"-ASC-6900 PLOTTED

OS 55 = 0

ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7 **** ISODAT **** START OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 OUTPUT STAGE OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900

**** ISOPLOT ****


OS 55 = 1

ISOGEN PC VERSION 7.7 **** ISODAT **** START OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900 OUTPUT STAGE OF DRAWING 6"-ASC-6900

**** ISOPLOT **** DRG 1 SHAPED DRG 1 SIMULATE


OS 55 = 2

ALIAS- 259 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Instrument identification

ALIAS

O.S. 59INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION

OS 59 = 1 - Outputs the Instrument Item Code on the Material List.

Note that this Option Switch only controls what parameter is outputon the Material List / Material Control File - the Instrument's Name orthe Instrument's Item Code. On the Drawing part - the Instrument's

Name is always output regardless of the Option Switch setting.

OS 59 = 0 - Outputs the Instrument Name on the Material List.

OS 59 = 0 or 1

ALIAS- 260 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Component tagging

ALIAS

O.S. 60COMPONENT TAGGING

OS 60 = 0No Component Tagging

OS 60 = 1Component TaggingOnand boxed in

OS 60 = 2Component TaggingOnbut not boxed in

ALIAS- 261 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Insulation indication

ALIAS

O.S. 61INSULATION INDICATION

OS 61 = 0Insulation Indication On -alongside Pipe only

OS 61 = 1Insulation IndicationSuppressed

OS 61 = 2Insulation Indication On -alongside Pipe &Components

ALIAS- 262 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Tracing indication

ALIAS

O.S. 62TRACING INDICATION

OS 62 = 0Tracing Indication On-alongside Pipe only

OS 62 = 2Tracing Indication On -alongside Pipe &Components

OS 61 = 0 & OS 62 = 0In this example - the Pipe isboth Traced and Insulated

ALIAS- 263 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Printed output: Page length

ALIAS

O.S. 63PRINTED OUTPUT - PAGE LENGTH

OS 63 = 0

OS 63 = 66

PAGE 1 PAGE 2

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX








XXXXXXXXXXXX





















66Lines






XXXXXXXXXXXX









XXXXXXXXXXXX













PAGE 1









PAGE 2

55Lines






ALIAS- 264 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipe support identification

ALIAS

O.S. 64PIPE SUPPORT IDENTIFICATION

OS 64 = 0 - No Support Name on the isometric - Item Codeoutput on the Material List

OS 64 = 1 - Support Name on the isometric un-boxed -Support Name output on the Material List

OS 64 = 2 - Support Name on the isometric boxed - Item Code output on the Material List

ALIAS- 265 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Bolting units

ALIAS

O.S. 65BOLTING UNITS

Bolts on the Isometric Material List and in the Material Control filemay be reported in any combination of Diameter and Length Units.

E.G. 5/8" Dia X 4" Long 5/8" Dia X 100 mm Long 16 mm Dia X 100 mm Long 16 mm Dia X 4" Long

The purpose of this Option Switch to enable the Bolt Diameter andLength values held in the Piping Data file to be correctly interpretedby the Program.

This is because regardless of what Units are being employed - allBolt Diameter and Length values are held in the Piping data File asinteger type numbers - Inch Units are held in 1/16" th's of an Inch Millimetres are held directly in mm's

Hence - 5/8" Diameter is held as 10 (ten sixteenths) 4" Long is held as 64 (64 sixteenths) 16 mm. Diameter is held as 16 100 mm. Long is held as 100

From this it can be seen that if this Option Switch is not set tocorrectly match the Bolt Unit values in the Piping Data file - theBolting information reported by the Program will be incorrect !

ALIAS- 266 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Co-ordinates: Supplementary

ALIAS

O.S. 66CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

66

This sketch shows the default co-ordinate information that is output

This type ofend co-ordinate -shown in red - is

controlled by O.S. 5- not O.S. 66

The Supplementaryelevations controlled byO.S. 66 Pos 1are shown here in green

1 OF 5

OS 66 = 0This default setting causes onlyelevations that change to a new level to beoutput - on arrowed out message lines.With this setting - even though N/S and E/Wco-ordinates may also change - they are notoutput

The Start End

ALIAS- 267 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


OS 66 = 1Causes all Supplementary co-ordinates and elevations to beoutput along Witness Lines instead of on arrowed-outmessages

2 OF 5

ALIAS- 268 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S 66CO-ORDINATES - SUPPLEMENTARY

3 OF 5

OS 66 = 221Supplementary elevations and co-ordinates output at Bend, Elbow,and Branch Intersection positions - in all those cases where theelevation level or N/S or E/W co-ordinates have changed.

ALIAS- 269 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


4 OF 5

OS 66 = 330 (or 331)A Full set of all three co-ordinates are output

ALIAS- 270 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


5 OF 5

Co-ordinates output at Isometric Split Points

1) OS 66 Pos 4 = Blank - Split Point co-ordinates not output

2) OS 66 Pos 4 = 1 - Split Point co-ordinates output

ALIAS- 271 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Sloping pipeline: 3D skew depiction

ALIAS

O.S. 67SLOPING PIPELINE - 3D SKEW DEPICTION -

OS 67 = 0 - 3D Box depiction

OS 67 = 1 - 2D Triangle + Falls Indicator

105

ALIAS- 272 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Sloping pipeline: Vertical branches

ALIAS

O.S. 68SLOPING PIPELINE - VERTICAL BRANCHES

OS 68 = 0 - Default to show the Short Tee branch leg skewed

OS 68 = 1 - To show the Short Tee branch leg straight

ALIAS- 273 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Terminal type identification

ALIAS

O.S. 69TERMINAL TYPE IDENTIFICATION

This Option Switch is used if you want to see your isometrics directlyon the screen rather than sent to a file and then plotted.

Note. You cannot send isometrics directly to the screen if you areusing the PC Version of Isogen or Spoolgen ! With that version

all isometric output must first be output to a file.

ALIAS- 274 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew identification: Branches

ALIAS

O.S. 70SKEW INDICATION - BRANCHES

OS 70 = 0 - Normal Skew Box / Triangle depiction

OS 70 = Value - Skew Box / Triangle suppressed(Here the value 4 was set)

ALIAS- 275 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material part number: Enclosure style

O.S. 73MATERIAL PART NUMBER - ENCLOSURE STYLE

1 OF 2

OS 73 = 0Standard Part Number Box

- No special Blank Style Enclosure Box

OS 73 = 12Square Ended Style 1 Blank Enclosure Box with

12 blank character spaces

The Blank boxesare for manually

addedinformation

5

STYLE 1 BLANKENCLOSURE BOXES

55

Note that the endtype of a Style 1Blank box iscontrolled byOS 73 Pos 5

0 1 2

ALIAS- 276 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 73

2 OF 2

MATERIAL PART NUMBER - ENCLOSURE STYLE

5

STYLE 2ENCLOSURE BOXES

OS 73 = 1200 & OS 76 = 1Diamond Ended Style 2 Enclosure Box with 12 blank

character spaces

Note that the endtype of a Style 2

box is controlled byOption Switch 76

55

0 1 2

The STYLE 3 ENCLOSURE BOX style is a special one - Itwas introduced for one ISOGEN client only and it

incorporatestheir particular requirements.

For this reason it is not shown here.

ALIAS- 277 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material list: Accumulation control

ALIAS

O.S. 74MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL

OS 74 = 0Default - whereby Fab

Erection & Offshore materialsare all accumulated normally

OS 74 = 3Non-accumulation for Fabmaterials - including Pipe

Note. Non-Accumulation means that each occurrence of an itemresults in a quantity of 1 OFF being listed - and for Pipe each

individual length is listed separately

1 OF 2

ALIAS- 278 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 74MATERIAL LIST ACCUMULATION CONTROL

2 OF 2

OS 74 = 13Non-accumulation for Erect

materials - Note that with thissetting Gaskets and Bolts are

still accumulated normally

OS 74 = 11113Non-accumulation for all Erect

materials - With this settingGaskets and Bolts are also

Non-accumulated.(Note that the Bolts are in

sets)

ALIAS- 279 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Weld number: Enclosure and prefix

O.S. 75WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSUREWELD NUMBER - PREFIX

In this example :-▼2 different Weld Number Enclosure types are demonstrated▼Fab and Erect Welds use their own Weld Numbering sequence▼Weld Number Prefixes are not shown

1 OF 2

Diamond Endedenclosure for FabWelds

Round Ended enclosurefor Erect Welds

OS 75 = 2 0 1

ALIAS- 280 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 75

This is the same as the previous example except that Weld NumberPrefixes are also shown here - SH for Fab

ER for Erect

WELD NUMBER - ENCLOSUREWELD NUMBER - PREFIX

OS 75 simply switches on the Weld Number Prefix facility - it doesnot define the actual Prefix character(s)

In the ISOGEN / SPOOLGEN systems the Prefix characters aredefined using -130 -131 -132 and -133 records

In the IDFGEN system the Prefix characters are defined using thefollowing Pipe Header attributes:-

WELD-PREFIX-GENERAL WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATIONWELD-PREFIX-ERECTION WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE

2 OF 2

OS 75 = 1 2 1 1

Fab WeldPrefix ON

Erect WeldPrefix ON

ALIAS- 281 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Material part number enclosure shape

ALIAS

O.S. 76MATERIAL PART NUMBER ENCLOSURE SHAPE

F3 G5 B6 2

Flange -Gasket -

Boltenclosure

Standardenclosure

EnclosureEnd Shape

Rectangular

OS 76

0

F3 G5 B6 2 Diamond 1

F3 G5 B6 2 Round 2

F3 G5 B6 2 No Enclosure 7

No Part NumberNo Enclosure 8

1 OF 3

OS 76 = 0Default Rectangular Ends

ALIAS- 282 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


2 OF 3

OS 76 = 1Diamond Ends

OS 76 = 2Round Ends

ALIAS- 283 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS


3 OF 3

OS 76 = 7No Enclosure Boxes

OS 76 = 8No Part Numbers nor Enclosure Boxes

ALIAS- 284 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges and reinforcement pads

ALIAS

O.S. 77

1 OF 2

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP-ONFLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS

OS 77 = 0 or 2For two Weld Numbers

OS 77 = 1For one Weld Number

OS 77 Pos 1 - Controls the quantity of Weld Numbersgenerated at Slip-On Flanges

OS 77 Pos 2 - Controls the quantity of Weld Numbersgenerated at Reinforcement Pads

OS 77 Pos 2 = 0 or BlankFor No extra Weld Numbers

ALIAS- 285 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 77

2 OF 2

WELD NUMBER ALLOCATION AT SLIP-ONFLANGES & REINFORCEMENT PADS

OS 77 Pos 3 - Enables the automatic generation of a plotted shape forthe Reinforcement Pad together with an Item Code and Description

entry on the Material List

OS 77 = 1 1 1For 1 extra Pad Weld Number and the generation of

a plotted Pad shape and Material List entry

OS 77 = 1 2 1For 2 extra Pad Weld Numbers

ALIAS- 286 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimensions: To valve centres

ALIAS

O.S. 80DIMENSIONS - TO VALVE CENTRES

OS 80 = 0Default for ordinaryDimensioning - to the ValveEnds

Notes.1) This example is for a Socket Weld Valve. The Dimensioning

method for this is controlled by OS 80 Pos 42) Further control for this function - by bore - is in OS 81 Pos 1

OS 80 = 1000For Dimensioning to the Valve Centreon Socket Weld Valves and Instruments

ALIAS- 287 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimensions: Branches

ALIAS

O.S. 81DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES

Positions 1-3 of this Option Switch are not for Branches at all. Thispart is actually an extension of OS 80 - whereby Dimensioning tothe Centres of Valve and Instruments may also be done by bore

range.(OS 80 controls Dimensioning to the Centres of Valve and

Instruments by end type)

1 OF 2

OS 81 Pos 1-3 = 24(& OS 80 Pos 4 =1)- Gives Dimensions to Valve / InstrumentCentreline for all bores up to andincluding 1.1/2"

OS 81 Pos 1-3 = 24(& OS 80 Pos 4 =1)- Gives Dimensions to ValveEnds for 2" bore

ALIAS- 288 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 81DIMENSIONS - BRANCHES

2 OF 2

Branch Dimensioning functions are controlled by Positions 4, 5 & 6and by Positions 7 & 8

OS 81 Pos 4 - 6 = BlankOS 81 Pos 7 & 8 = Blank- Gives full Branch Dimensioning -regardless of the Branch Bore and theNumber of components in the Branch

OS 81 = 48 000- Suppresses BranchDimensioning on Branch Bores 3"and less - regardless of thenumber of components in theBranch

OS 81 = 2 048 000- Puts Branch Dimensioning back onagain - because the Branch has morethan 2 components

ALIAS- 289 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

C of G/weight output

ALIAS

O.S. 82C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT

1 OF 2

OS 82 Pos 1 switches On the C of G / Weights facility - andcontrols whether the output values are per Pipeline or per Drawing

OS 82 Pos 1 2 & 3 = 1 1 1 - For Weight outputs

Dry Weight (Pipeline Empty)Wet Weight (Pipeline Full)Insulation Weight

Option Switch 82 provides further Weight functionality to that in OS 41 Pos 4 & 5 which is for basic Component Weights only

OS 82 adds controls for :-▼ Full (Wet) Pipeline Weight▼ Weight Of Insulation▼ Centre of Gravity of Pipeline - Empty or Full - with or

without Insulation

Notes1) These Weights are per Drawing and are output in this style

on the Drawing Frame using the ISOGEN TextPos facility2) The Pipe Empty Weight is derived solely from the Weight of

components

ALIAS- 290 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 82C of G / WEIGHT OUTPUT

2 OF 2

OS 82 Pos 4 & 5 = 2 3 - For Centre of Gravity Outputs

Dry (Empty) C of G and Dry (Empty) + Insulation C of G positionWet (Full) Pipe + Insulation C of G position

ALIAS- 291 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

DXF file units

O.S. 92

1DrawingUnderlay

3IsometricOutput

Drawings

2Detail

Sketches

DXF FILE UNITS

Where used - the Drawing Underlay (1) and Detail Sketches (2)must be consistent in respect of the Units they are constructed with.

The resultant Output Drawing (3) will be generated by ISOGEN in thesame Units.

DETAIL - A

SEE DETAIL -A

DETAIL - DETAIL -DETAIL -

ALIAS- 292 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Component leg length

ALIAS

O.S. 95COMPONENT LEG LENGTH

OS 95 = 0Default for Leg Lengthof 9 mm

OS 95 = 12Showing increased LegLengths of 12 mm

ALIAS- 293 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew depiction: Individual/overall

ALIAS

O.S. 97SKEW DEPICTION - INDIVIDUAL / OVERALL

OS 97 = 0Default for Single Overall Box / Triangle enclosure around theSkew section (This example shows a Triangle)

OS 97 = 1For individual Box / Triangle Skew enclosures around each Branchsection

ALIAS- 294 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew depiction: Style

ALIAS

O.S. 99SKEW DEPICTION - STYLE

OS 99 = 0Default for Skew Box depiction with normal dimensioning style

OS 99 = 1Skew Triangle depiction with normal dimensioning style

OS 99 = 3Skew Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning style

1 OF 2

ALIAS- 295 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 99

2 OF 2


3D Skew Sections - will normally follow the value in Pos 1that are set for 2D skews - unless the value 1 is set in Pos 2

In this 3D Skew example OS 99 Pos 2 is not set (it is left blank)- So the skew type follows what is set in Pos 1 - in this case value 3 -which gives Triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning style -as in the last example on the previous page

Changing OS 99 Pos 2 = 1 causes 3D skews to be shown in theBox style - like this example here

ALIAS- 296 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew depiction: Dimension line standout

ALIAS

O.S. 100SKEW DEPICTION - DIMENSION LINE STANDOUT

This Option Switch is used to move the Triangle Dimension further out

OS 100 = 0Default for standard dimensiondistance - plotted alongside the

triangle line

OS 100 = 120Gives an increased

standout distance of 12 mm

ALIAS- 297 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew depiction: Triangle hatching

ALIAS

O.S. 101SKEW DEPICTION - TRIANGLE HATCHING

This Option Switch enables Skew Triangles to be optionally filled inwith Hatching Lines

The controls here allow you to :-

▼ Vary the distance between the Hatch Lines▼ Have Full or Partial Hatching - Partial Hatching is where only part

of the triangle area is Hatched▼ With Partial Hatching - vary the amount of the Hatching

OS 101 = 1Default for Triangle Hatching On -This gives Full Hatching with aHatch Line pitch of 1 mm

1 OF 2

OS 101 = 40This gives Full Hatching with anincreased Hatch Line pitch of 4mm

ALIAS- 298 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

O.S. 101SKEW DEPICTION - TRIANGLE HATCHING

2 OF 2

OS 101 = 3540This gives Partial Hatching with anHatch Line pitch of 4 mm and amaximum Hatch Line Length of 35mm

When setting Pos 3 & 4 to define aHatch Line Cut-Off value like that above - this is the lengththat is defined- in the above example this is 35 mm

ALIAS- 299 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Skew depiction: matching clearance

ALIAS

O.S. 102SKEW DEPICTION - HATCHING CLEARANCE

This Option Switch controls the size of the Clearance Gaps thatoccur in and around Hatching There are three of these such gaps :-

▼ Local to the Pipeline▼ Local to In-Line Components▼ Around Dimensions and Text that appear in the Hatching

region

Local toPipeline

Local toComponents

AroundDimensions

and Text

OS 102 = 0Default Gaps at all threepositions

OS 102 = 404040Gaps increased to 4 mmat all three positions

ALIAS- 300 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Pipeline splitting: In tube

ALIAS

O.S. 108PIPELINE SPLITTING - IN TUBE

DRAWING1

DRAWING 2

ISOGEN wants to split thepipeline into 2 drawings -in tube - at this point

SITUATION

This Option Switch controls what action the Program musttake when presented with the above situation

For the three possible actions - see the Options & Atext manual

ALIAS- 301 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Repeatability file content

ALIAS

O.S. 109REPEATABILITY FILE CONTENT

When it is required to pass ISOGEN generated information back toyour 3D Design System - then the REPEATABILITY (or RETURN)

File System is used

Not all 3D Systems can use it however !Some don't have the capability

For details of what information may be passed back in this way - seethe list in the Options & AText Manual

Note. This Option Switch also contains a non-Repeatability function -Position 6 controls the action of component Re-ordering in By-Passes

This Re-ordering function is done by default - OS 109 Pos 6 = 0 orblank -

In a by-pass like this - to enable correctspools to be generated - ISOGEN needs to havethe closure point at either of these two positions

Explanation :-

However, the IDFextraction programof some 3D Designsystems sets theclosure point here or here

By default - OS 109 Pos 6 = 0 or blank - which causes ISOGEN toalways set the by-pass closure point at the preferred position. If

this proves to give problems - you must unset this action bysetting Pos 6 = 1

ALIAS- 302 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Ghost gaps

ALIAS

O.S. 110GHOST GAPS

Ghost Gaps are created in the 3D Design System and are used to linkrelated, but unconnected components - for example :-

▼ One Pipeline to another - to form a System Isometric▼ One part of a Pipeline to another part of the same Pipeline -

where a middle section may have a 'hold' on it - thus remainingincomplete and not finished

OS 110 = 0Gives thestandard sizeGap - likethis

OS 110 = 50Increasesthe Gap sizeso it lookslike this

These examplesshows part of a

Systemisometric

- consisting of 2Pipelines

Note. Gaps maybe dimensioned orun-dimensioned -but this feature isnot controlled bythis Option Switch- it is controlledfrom within the 3DDesign Systemwherebyappropriatesettings are madein the extractedPiping Data File

(This exampleshows an un-dimensioned Gap)

ALIAS- 303 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Nozzles

ALIAS

O.S. 111NOZZLES

OS 111 = 0Default - Nozzles Not plotted

OS 111 = 1Nozzles plotted

ALIAS- 304 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Flow arrows: Pipeline

ALIAS

O.S. 112FLOW ARROWS - PIPELINE

OS 112 = 0or 8

OS 112 = 15OS 112 = 5

ALIAS- 305 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Spec break indication

ALIAS

O.S. 114SPEC BREAK INDICATION

OS 114 = 0Default for the old style single SpecBreak indication box

NoteAlthough it is shown here - thisstyle is now redundant and shouldnotbe usedAs you can see - its not clear whichside of the division line the new specis referring to

OS 114 = 1Two box indication

This is the recommend method -this style is more informative - itclearly indicates the spec for bothsides of the division line

ALIAS- 306 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Tolerance: Offset angle

ALIAS

O.S. 115TOLERANCE - OFFSET ANGLE

This Option Switch enables you to prevent the generation ofunwanted Skews. The Piping Data File extraction programs of some

3D Design Systems can contain small dimension inaccuracies -leading to small movements at some pipe ends These small

movements are then detected by ISOGEN which then generates aSkew section

Case 1 - OS 115 = 0

3

3 mm movementin N/S plane - gives askew angle of 0.08°

Case 2 - OS 115 = 25

This demonstrates thatsetting a .25 degree cut-off value causes theunwanted skew not to begenerated

NoteOption Switch OS 116 also controls unwanted skew generation - butusing a dimensional toleranceHowever - either OS 115 or OS 116 must be set ! not bothOf the two Option Switches - OS 116 is the preferred one for you toset - but OS 115 takes precedence if both are set

ALIAS- 307 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Tolerance: Dimension offset

ALIAS

O.S. 116TOLERANCE - DIMENSION OFFSET

Like OS 115 - this Option Switch also enables the prevention ofunwanted Skews - but by means of a Dimension Tolerance rather

than an Angle Tolerance

Case 1 - OS 116 = 0

1 mm movementin N/S plane - causes askew to be generated

Case 2 - OS 116 = 250

This demonstrates thatsetting a 2 mm cut-offvalue causes theunwanted skew not to begenerated

NoteOption Switch OS 115 also controls unwanted skew generation - butusing an angular toleranceHowever - either OS 116 or OS 115 must be set ! not bothOf the two Option Switches - OS 116 is the preferred one for you toset - but OS 115 takes precedence if both are set

1

ALIAS- 308 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimensions: Overall

ALIAS

O.S. 118DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

OS 118 = 1Overall Dimensions On -Going across Branches

OS 118 = 2Overall Dimensions On -Stopping at Branches

1 OF 2

OS 118 = 3Overall Dimensions On -Going to Valve Centresand going across Branches

ALIAS- 309 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 118DIMENSIONS - OVERALL

OS 118 = 4Overall Dimensions On -Going to Valve Centresbut stopping at Branches

2 OF 2

OS 118 = 344The value 34 inPos 2 & 3causes theStandout distancefor the OverallDimensions to bemoved out from thestandarddistance to 34 mm

Note that doing this causesthe standard dimension layerto move to the inner position

OS 118 = 344 withOS 8 = 16This is to demonstrate that if you put avalue in OS 118 Pos 2 & 3 - you mustput a value in OS 8 to control the normaldimension standout distance and keep itin the standard position also

ALIAS- 310 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Dimensions/elevation: Vertical

ALIAS

O.S. 119DIMENSIONS / ELEVATION - VERTICAL

OS 119 = 0Default for NormalVertical pipe Dimensions &Elevations plotted at intersectionpoints when the level changes

OS 119 = 1All Vertical Dimensionssuppressed and replacedby Elevation Messages

1 OF 2

ALIAS- 311 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 119DIMENSIONS / ELEVATION - VERTICAL

OS 119 = 2For Vertical Dimensionsand Elevations output atall normal dimensioningpositions

2 OF 2

ALIAS- 312 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Tapping: Branch scale/branch dimensions/branch co-ordinates

ALIAS

O.S. 120TAPPING - BRANCH SCALE

O.S. 121

O.S. 122

TAPPING - BRANCH DIMENSIONS

TAPPING - BRANCH CO-ORDINATES

OS 120 = 60 - Reduced Branch ScalingOS 121 = 1 - Branch Dimensions OFFOS 122 = 1 - Tapping Point Co-ords plotted

OS 120 = 0 - Full size BranchOS 121 = 0 - Branch Dimension OnOS 122 = 0 - No Tapping Point Co-ords

ALIAS- 313 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Instrument ID enclosure

ALIAS

O.S. 123INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

OS 123 = 5For the Instrument Nameto be plotted inside a 5character size Balloon

OS 123 = 0Default for No Balloonaround Instrument Name

OS 123 = 4This Instrument Name has a $character in it to make the namebe plotted over 2 lines -here, it is inside a 4 charactersize Balloon

1 OF 2

ALIAS- 314 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

ALIAS

O.S. 123

OS 123 Pos 3 - Controls alternative Enclosure Box Shapes

1 gives CV200

2 CV200

3 C1

4 C1

5 CV200

INSTRUMENT ID ENCLOSURE

OS 123 = 100For Diamond Ended Boxenclosure aroundInstrument Name

2 OF 2

Note that with these enclosure styles the Instrument Name mustbe on one line - that is, the $ feature cannot be used in the name

ALIAS- 315 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Flange/rotation angles

ALIAS

O.S. 124FLANGE ROTATION ANGLES

OS 124 = 0Default for FlangeRotationAngles Notindicated

OS 124 = 1Flange RotationAngle indicated

OS 124 = 11Flange RotationAngle indicated - in aDiamond Ended box

Other Box ShapesOS124 Pos 2

FLANGE ROTATION 45.0°

FLANGE ROTATION 45.0°

2 =

3 =

ALIAS- 316 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Isogen version/run date

ALIAS

O.S. 127ISOGEN VERSION / RUN DATE

OS 127 = 0Default for BannerNot to be plotted

OS 127 = 1For Bannerto be plotted

ALIAS- 317 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Fab friendly isometrics

ALIAS

O.S. 128FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS (FFI)

The FAB FRIENDLY ISOMETRICS System was introducedfor a particular ALIAS client

The System uses SPOOLGEN type on-screen probing methodsto break down and re-assemble parts of long pipelines into

required isometric combinations

The System uses the clients particular (that is, non-general)working practices

ALIAS- 318 -

turn tot sheet

Refron

Interactive editing

ALIAS

O.S. 129INTERACTIVE EDITING

Set this Option Switch to value 1 to obtain the SPOOLGENInteractive Editing System (also called Probing)

As stated in the OPTIONS & ATEXT MANUAL - this featureonly operates on PC based computers under MS Windows 3.XX

or Windows NT

ALIAS- 319 -

Versions


SbSb

ISSUE DATE MODIFICATIONS

ISOGEN Version Number

1.0 1 Mar 95 First Release V 7.22.0 1 Jul 96 O.S. 2 New Switch Positions 3 & 4 added.

V7.3toV 7.7

O.S. 4 Switch Values 3, 4 & 5 added.O.S. 8 Revised in-line with changes added to O.S. 4.O.S. 9 Description of settings for Switch Position 1 re-

written.O.S. 21 New Switch Position 3 added.O.S. 23 New Switch Position 2 Value 2 and Switch Posi-

tion 3 Value 4 added.O.S. 24 New Switch Position 2 Value 2 added.O.S. 27 Switch Values 3, 4 & 5 added.O.S. 39 New Switch Position 1 Value 2 added.O.S. 40 New Switch Value 3 added.O.S. 41 Switch Position 3 now brought into use.

New Switch Positions 6, 7 & 8 added.O.S. 53 New Switch Position 5 added.O.S. 54 Related Option Switch 77 added.O.S. 71 Note added to Switch Position 4 Value 4.O.S. 73 Switch Title & Description revised due to intro-

duction of O.S. 76. Note added to Switch Posi-tions 3 & 4.

O.S. 74 Switch Position 1 Value 3 added.O.S. 75 New Switch Value 7 added. Related Option

Switch 77 added.O.S. 76 New Option Switch.O.S. 77 New Option Switch.O.S. 109 Switch Position 6 now brought into use.O.S. 111 New Switch Position 2 added.

ALIAS- 320 -


SbSb

O.S. 128 New Option Switch.O.S. 7 New Switch Position 3 added.O.S. 64 New Switch Values 3 & 4 added.

3.0 1 Aug 98 O.S. 2 New Switch Position 5 added.

V 7.8toV 7.14.5

O.S. 26 New Switch Position 3 added.O.S. 39 New Switch Position 5 and 6 added.O.S. 40 New Switch Position 5 added.O.S. 71 New Values 7 & 8 added to Switch

Positions 1 & 2.O.S. 77 New Switch Position 4 added.O.S. 109 New Value 2 added to Switch Positions 4 & 5.O.S. 120 New Switch Positions 4 & 5 added.

1 May 99 O.S. 6 New Switch Position 3 added. V 7.16.0O.S. 21 New Switch values 8 & 9 added. V 7.16.0O.S. 53 New Switch Position 6 and 7 added. V 7.16.0O.S. 55 New Switch Postions 2 & 3 added. V 7.16.0O.S. 78 New Option Switch. V 7.16.0

31 Jan 00 O.S. 41 New weight output added for Switch Position 4. V 7.17.721 July 00 O.S. 66 New Switch Positions 5 and 6 added. V 8.3.02 Aug 00 O.S. 79 New Option Switch V 8.4.022 Sept 00 O.S. 39 New Switch Position 7 added V 8.5.115 Dec 00 O.S. 95 New Switch Position 3 added V 8.5.015 Dec 00 O.S. 9 Switches 2, 5 and 7 modified V 8.5.415 Dec 00 O.S. 41 Option Switch Position 2,3 and 6 modified V 8.5.415 Dec 00 O.S. 109 Option Switch Position 1 modified V 8.5.49 Apr 01 O.S. 8 Option Switch Position 3 modified V 8.6.09 Apr 01 O.S. 9 New Switch Position 8 added V 8.6.09 Apr 01 O.S. 4 New Switch Position 4 added V 8.6.09 Apr 01 O.S. 9 Option Switch Position 6 modified V 8.7.09 Apr 01 O.S. 2 New Switch Position 6 added v 8.7.09 Apr 01 O.S. 31 New Switch Position 2 added V 8.7.03 Jul 01 O.S. 2 Option Switch Position 6 modified V 8.7.23 Jul 01 O.S. 8 Option Switch Position 4 added V 8.8.03 Jul 01 O.S. 39 Option Switch Position 6 modified V 8.8.027 Nov 01 O.S. 71 Option Switch Position 4 and 7 modified V 8.8.117 May 02 O.S. 31 Switch Position 1 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 39 Switch Position 3 modified, 8 and 9 added V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 54 New Switch Positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 added V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 71 Switch Positions 1/3 and 4/6 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 75 Switch Positions 1,3 and 5 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 75 New Switch Positions 7, 8 and 9 added V 8.10.0



ALIAS- 321 -


SbSb

17 May 02 O.S. 76 Switch Position 1 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 76 New Switch Positions 2 and 3 added V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 77 New Switch Positions 5 and 7 added V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 78 Switch Positions 1, 3 and 5 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 78 New Switch Positions 7, 8 and 9 added V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 79 Switch Position 3 modified V 8.10.017 May 02 O.S. 79 Switch Position 9 added V 8.10.018 Nov 02 O.S. 2 Switch Position 5 modified V 8.10.518 Nov 02 O.S. 24 Switch Position 2 modified V 8.10.52 Apr 03 O.S. 2 Switch Position 7 and 8 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 9 Switch Position 9 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 19 Switch Position 2 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 38 Switch Position 4 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 39 Switch Position 5 modified V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S 41 Switch Position 9 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S 53 Switch Position 8 and 9 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S 65 Switch Position 3 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 70 Switch Position 3 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 95 Switch Position 4 and 5 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S 99 Switch Position 3 added V.8.11.02 Apr 03 O.S. 117 Switch Position 1 modified V.8.11.0



ALIAS- 322 -

witches y number

Sb

IndexClick on an Option Switch name/page number to access switch information. Where more than one page number is shown, click on the separate pagenumbers to view different sheets relating to the named switch.

BBending file 9Bolting units 86Bore control 55

CCentre of Gravity 116Clear screen 79Component leg length 130Component tagging 81Co-ordinates

connection 7connectivity 7supplementary 87

Cut piece add-on allowance 30Cut piece list type 2Cut piece numbering type 2

DDate output 8Detailed marker 43Development testing 170, 171, 172, 173, 174,175, 176, 177, 179, 180Dimension control 55Dimension form 14Dimension line standout 11Dimensions

branches 114overall 155round off 154to valve centres 112vertical 157

Drawingreserved areas 45

Drawing frameprogram standard 25

Drawing marginbottom 19

left 16right 17top 18

Drawing outputfile 41picture scale 44scaling 42screen 41stacking orientation 47stacking value 46

Drawing sizeheight 22standard postscript plotter size 20width 23

Drawing text size 5Drawing trim marks 4Drawing viewpoint 59DXF file units 127

EElevations

vertical 157Equipment trim drawings 69

FFab friendly isometrics 167Flange rotation angles 163Flow arrows

components 24pipeline 149

GGhost gaps 147

IInstrument ID enclosure 161Instrument identification 80Insulation indication 82Interactive editing 169Isogen

run date 166version 166

Isometric type 28, 29

MMaterial control

ALIAS- 322 -

witches y number

Sb

comdace file contents 125comdace file controls 126pipeline identification 150

Material listaccumulation control 100continuation method 39controls 31descriptions 35file type 31item code length 37line spacing 38pipeline length units 33pipeline/drawing 33position 34text size 36

Material part numberenclosure shape 104enclosure style 98

NNozzles

dotted 148

PPipe support identification 85Pipe supports 52Pipe wastage factor

area 1 60area 2 61area 3 62area 4 63area 5 64area 6 65area 7 66area 8 67area 9 68

Pipeline splittingautomatic 48in tube 144user control 9

PlotfileASCII text 178DGN link 178

Plotfile format 95Plotfile length 1Printed output

page length 84Program messages

isodat 77isoplot 78run information 75

RRepeatability file content 145Reserved 97, 131, 164, 165Revision marker 43

SSkew depiction

dimension line standout 136hatching clearance 138individual 132overall 132style 134triangle hatching 137

Skew indicationbranches 94

Sloping pipeline3D skew depiction 90vertical branches 91

Sloping pipeline indication limit 27Sloping pipeline indication method 26Spare switch 107, 110, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122,123, 124, 128, 129, 133, 139, 140, 141, 142,143Specification break indication 151Spool piece identifiers 49

TTapping

branch co-ordinates 160branch dimensions 159branch scale 158

Terminal type identification 92Title block

position 34Tolerance

angle offset 152dimension offset 153

Tracing indication 83

WWeight control 55Weight output 116Weld number

enclosure 102prefix 102

Weld number allocation at slip-on flanges andreinforcement pads 105Weld numbering 71

ALIAS- 323 -

witches y number

Sb

Weld plotting 74

ALIAS- 324 -

Switches by number

Switches by name- 325 -

How to navigate this file:

About us:Alias Limited is situated in the North-West of England. Our business is software, to design, document, fabricate and maintain piping systems.

Contact us:Alias Limited1 Stuart RoadManor ParkRuncornCheshireWA7 1TSEngland

Telephone: (+44) (0) 1928 579311Fax: (+44) (0) 1928 579389email: [email protected]

ALIAS

Return tofront sheet

Next/previous sheet(some switches run over more than one sheet)

Next/previous switch

Accesses switch front sheet

Accesses this page

DetailsAccesses switch detail sheet(if available)

Switches by number

Switches by name

Brings up a table of contents ordered either by switch name, or by switch number. You can access any of the switch front sheets from here

AText Reference GuideALIAS

AText Reference Guide

ALIAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR INCI-DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

It is the policy of Alias Limited to enforce any and all rights relating to protection of this information. The information contained in this manual is proprietary in nature and may not be reproduced, copied or divulged in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Alias Limited. This manual has been provided pursuant to the terms of a contract or confidentiality agreement. Unauthorised distribution or disclosure of its contents is a violation of that contract or agreement and persons doing so may be liable for penalties as provided by law.

Copyright © 1991-2004 Alias Limited. All Rights Reserved.

Alias Limited,1 Stuart Road, Manor ParkRuncorn, CheshireWA7 1TSUnited KingdomTelephone: +44 (0) 1928 579311Fax: +44 (0) 1928 579389Email: [email protected]

I-Sketch™, I-Sketch Classic™, I-Sketch Field™, I-Sketch™, I-Convert™, I-Export™, I-Run™, I-View™, I-View CAD™, I-Tools™, I-Serve™, I-Data Integrator™, I-Data Estimator™, PLS Router™, SPOOLGEN™ and ISOGEN™ are registered trademarksof Alias Limited.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The Isometric Drawing Area

AText listed by category and number order:

Click on an AText to access its information.

The Isometric Drawing Area-201 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-202 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N-203 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W-204 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-205 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EL +-206 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EL --207 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -?NS-208 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONN. TO-209 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONT. ON-210 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - F-211 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - G-212 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-213 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SPINDLE-214 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MM-215 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCING FLANGE-216 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFFSET-217 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MITRE-218 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LOBSTER-219 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REINFORCED-220 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LEFT LOOSE-221 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FFW-222 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FALL-223 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-224 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -:-225 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-226 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -GRAD-227 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PER M-228 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PER FT-229 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED END-230 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VENT-231 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEND-232 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SPEC-233 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-236 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-237 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - "-238 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '

ALIAS


-239 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRAIN-240 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-241 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-242 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-243 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-244 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP-245 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DOWN-246 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NORTH-247 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOUTH-248 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EAST-249 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -WEST-275 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SWEPT TEE-276 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONT. FROM-277 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ORIFICE FLANGE-278 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DIAL FACE-279 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - L-280 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TAPPING-281 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TAIL-282 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WINDOW-283 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLAT-284 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEE BEND-285 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -RATING FLANGE-286 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-287 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ORIENTATION DIRECTION-288 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE-298 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEE ELBOW-337 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D BEND RADIUS-338 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEND RADIUS-346 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GEARBOX ORIENTATION-349 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PP-350 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCING ELBOW-356 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U-357 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-358 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W-362 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END$ONE-388 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TANGENTIAL CONNECTION-389 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFFSET CONNECTION-390 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FROM ? ORIGIN-391 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)-392 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MULTIPLE-394 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -TOT-425 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEAL WELD-433 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-434 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STUB IN-437 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-450 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -B.O.P.-451 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TAPPING CONNECTION

ALIAS

Specification Change Indication

-452 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT-454 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONNECTION ORIENTATION-455 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-456 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEE DETAIL ?-457 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MITRE ?-458 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)-459 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ?THK-469 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFERENCE POINT-470 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORT LOCATION-477 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CUT OUT ?-460 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEAM$?-461 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -COLUMN$?-462 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ?$BUILDING CL-463 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CL EQUIPMENT$?-464 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -CL PIPELINE$?-465 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ?$FLOOR LEVEL-466 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ?$WALL-467 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GRID LINE$?-468 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ?-471 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LOCATION-POINT?-475 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-476 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-498 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-499 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SHOP TEST WELD-501 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-502 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORT-512 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TACK WELD-533 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FI-534 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - RL-535 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SU-536 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VL-539 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.-541 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _N-542 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_S-543 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-544 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-545 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -/-885 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Delimiter

Specification Change Indication-289 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MATL-290 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -INSUL-291 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRACE-292 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PAINT-293 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

ALIAS

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

-294 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-295 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-296 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-297 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas-250 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DATE-251 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PROJECT NO.-252 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BATCH REF-253 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPING SPEC-254 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ISS-255 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRG-256 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OF-257 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SPL-258 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -JAN-259 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FEB-260 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAR-261 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -APR-262 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAY-263 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -JUN-264 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JUL-265 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUG-266 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SEP-267 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OCT-268 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOV-269 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -DEC-270 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - THERMAL INSULATION SPEC-271 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRACING SPEC-272 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PAINTING SPEC-436 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JACKET SPEC

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts-274 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FABRICATION MATERIALS-301 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PT-302 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NO-303 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -COMPONENT DESCRIPTION-304 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N.S.-305 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ITEM CODE-306 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -QTY-307 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE-308 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FITTINGS-309 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FLANGES

ALIAS

The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-310 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ERECTION MATERIALS-311 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GASKETS-312 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BOLTS-313 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS-314 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTRUMENTS-315 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORTS-316 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE SPOOLS-319 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CUT PIPE LENGTH-320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PIECE-321 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NO-322 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -CUT-323 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LENGTH-324 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REMARKS-325 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-326 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PLD BEND-327 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOOSE FLG-328 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FF WELD-329 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - M-330 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INS-331 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MM-334 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-335 - - - - - - - - - - - WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)-339 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS-340 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INDUCTION BEND ID-341 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS-342 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOZZLE REF --343 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONTINUED-344 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END CONNECTORS-345 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AND-347 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-348 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-351 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND-352 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WEIGHT-353 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - KGS-354 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LBS-355 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG-356 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U-357 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-358 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W-359 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-362 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END$ONE-363 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - END$TWO-364 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ITEM$CODE-365 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-366 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SQ.CUT-367 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEVEL-368 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED

ALIAS

The Line Summary Area

-369 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SHAPED-370 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -MITRED-371 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFFSHORE MATERIALS-372 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REMARKS-373 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REM-374 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ANGLE-375 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WELDS-376 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FAB-377 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EREC-378 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFF-379 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT-380 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT-381 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT-382 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS-383 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - *-384 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TANGENT+-385 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CUT/WELD-426 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GROOVED-427 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLARED-428 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED-431 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOCKET-472 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No.?-473 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OF-474 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ABOVE-500 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SHOP TEST-503 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SPOOL ID-514 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REINFPAD-515 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @-537 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-538 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-540 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

The Line Summary Area-400 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRACED$PIPE-401 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LAGGED$PIPE-402 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE$SUPPORT-403 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - COMPN$JOINT-404 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED$JOINT-405 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOCKET$WELD-406 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIELD$WELD-407 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SHOP$WELD-408 - - - - - - - - - - - - - (User specified text on Drawing Frame)-409 - - - - - - - - - - - - - (User specified text on Drawing Frame)-410 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO$ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO

ALIAS

The Printed Material List

-411 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SITE$CONNECTION-317 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE NS-318 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CL LENGTH-360 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FT-361 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FT-INS-386 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)-387 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Normally Blank)

The Printed Material List-332 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PAGE-333 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPELINE REF-336 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SYSTEM REF

The Weld Box Summary-412 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --413 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --414 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-415 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - F-416 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O-417 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BW-418 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SW-419 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MW-420 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LUG-421 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SOF-422 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOB-423 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LET-424 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLW-438 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SEAM-504 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-507 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -RPD-508 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -LF-509 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -L4-510 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-511 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PAD-513 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TW-516 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -TRN-517 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-518 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-519 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EB-520 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - RL-521 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FW-522 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-523 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

ALIAS

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

-524 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-525 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-526 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-527 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-528 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-529 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-530 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-531 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)-532 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation-481 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-482 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N-483 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W-484 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-485 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - U-486 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-487 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -*** REFERENCE FLAT ***-488 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -*** REFERENCE SPINDLE ***-489 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - *** REFERENCE SUPPORT ***-490 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -*** REFERENCE BRANCH ***-491 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - *** REFERENCE WINDOW ***-492 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -FLAT DIRECTION-493 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SPINDLE DIRECTION-494 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORT DIRECTION-495 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -BRANCH DIRECTION-496 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WINDOW DIRECTION-497 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLANGE ROTATION ?

The COMPIPE Material Control Links-299 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -/-453 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -MM-

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display-800 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BEND-801 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ELBOW-802 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OLET-803 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEE-804 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CROSS-805 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCER-806 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEE REDUCER-807 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCING FLANGE

ALIAS

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

-808 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEE BEND/ELBOW-809 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ANGLE VALVE-810 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 WAY VALVE-811 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 WAY VALVE-812 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -INSTRUMENT-813 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MISC COMPONENT-814 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PIPE (TUBE-815 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIXED PIPE-816 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIPE BLOCK-817 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLANGE-818 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LJSE FLANGE-819 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -BLIND FLANGE-820 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -CONNECTOR-821 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - BACKING NUT-822 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CLAMP-823 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT-824 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -CAP-825 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - COUPLING-826 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNION-827 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VALVE-828 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRAP-829 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VENT-830 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILTER-831 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUPPORT-832 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTRUMENT TEE-833 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -WELD-834 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -NONE-835 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Not Used)-836 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Not Used)-837 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Not Used)-838 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Not Used)-839 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (Not Used)-840 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Changed to Bend-841 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Flange set to Loose-842 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Detail Sketch ?-843 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Support changed to Fabrication-844 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Support changed to Erection-845 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Support changed to Offshore-846 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Tack Weld-847 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Support(s) added-848 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Automatic Weld-849 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Shop Test-850 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCING-CONCENTRIC-851 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REDUCING ECCENTRIC-852 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STUB/BACKING PAIR-853 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SCREWED-854 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLIP-ON J TYPE

ALIAS

Reference Plane System

-855 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLIP-ON-856 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SOCKET-WELD-857 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WELD-NECK-858 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLIP-ON ORIFICE-859 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WELD-NECK ORIFICE-860 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LAP-JOINT RING-861 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LAP-JOINT STUB END-862 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNKNOWN-863 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Material added-864 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - General Information Note - ?-865 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Specific Information Note - ?-866 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Weld deleted-867 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Support Weld(s) deleted-868 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Spool Name deleted-869 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Flow Arrow deleted-870 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Message deleted-871 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Detail Sketch deleted-872 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Information Note deleted-873 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Additional Material deleted-874 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Loose Flange un-set-875 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Location point added-876 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Location point deleted-877 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION-878 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FLOW ARROW-879 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INSULATION SYMBOL-880 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MESSAGE-881 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Drawing Identifier deleted-882 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Default Start-883 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pipeline Start-884 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Default Bypass Closure-885 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---886 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bypass Closure-887 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pipe Support added-888 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pipe Support deleted-889 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Properties changed-890 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Coupling Added-891 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Coupling Deleted-892 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pipe Support Changed

Reference Plane System-443 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ^ + ?-444 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -^ - ?-445 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ^ + ?-446 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -^ - ?-447 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ^ + ?

ALIAS


-448 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -^ - ?-449 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(Normally blank)

Versions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45

ALIAS

AText

What is AText?AText is an abbreviation for Alternative Text, a powerful ISOGEN feature thatenables any text on the isometric drawing to be easily changed or removed.

How It Works - The Basics

The feature operates by assigning a unique identification number to eachstandard text string, this number is then simply referred to whenever a changeneeds to be done to the text string that the number represents. By definition, astandard text string may either be a single character, a single word, or a group ofwords. Furthermore, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all blank word.

The total number of separate standard text strings held by the program in this wayis in excess of 300.

What AText Can Be Used For

AText allows Users to substitute their own text terminology or language in place ofthe standard ISOGEN words on the isometric.

To effect a word change, you don't have to replace all the standard AText, as littleas just one word may be changed if that's all is needed.

� Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, usersmust exercise a certain amount of care when defining their own words, particularlyin respect of word lengths. As a general rule, newly defined words or word stringsshould be about equal in length or shorter than the text that is being replaced.(Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line headings in theMaterial List region). In this respect, the user takes full responsibility for worddefinition and ISOGEN will not warn you in cases where words are too long andhence cannot be accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric.

ALIAS- 12 -

Badly designed AText can lead to undesirable results such as over-writing orincorrectly positioned text.

Foreign Language Use

AText can be of particular benefit to foreign language Users who wish to produceisometrics containing text in their native tongue. However there are restrictionsgoverning which characters are permissible. For details, see the following paragraph dealing with usable characters.

The Usable Character Set

There is a requirement that only standard English and certain special purposecharacters, as listed here, are used in AText definitions,.

• Upper or lower case letters in the range A to Z.

• Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive.• A blank space character.

• The special purpose symbols * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %

Other foreign language characters as used in such alphabets as Cyrillic, Greek, orChinese are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, for example, à, á,â, etc. as used in certain European languages.

Special Characters

i) The Dollar sign ($)

This special character, that is used in ISOGEN to force a New Line in regular isometric Message Text can also be used with ATexts. The recommendation isthat, when the $ character is used in ATexts, Users should acceptfull responsibility and carefully check the output results of each occurrence.

ii) The Question mark (?)

Has two different uses, as follows:-

• Can be used in AText's -210, -211 and -212 to suppress the plotting of thesingle characters normally associated with these AText's, without switchingoff their associated facility, as would normally happen when an AText is setto blank. For example, setting Atext -210 ? just causes the F that would normally be plotted to be suppressed. It does not completely suppress theplotting of the Flange Material List Part Number as would normally happenwhen an Atext item is set to blank. This can be particularly advantageouson Spool isometrics.

• The ? character is also used in some special AText's at points where theprogram dynamically edits in information. E.g. By default, AText -456 is setto DETAIL ?. With this AText the program edits in either a letter or a

ALIAS- 13 -

number (depending upon which system the user has specified) at the position of the ? character.

iii) The 'at' sign (@)• This character may be used to 'pad out' an AText string with trailing blanks.

This would be done so that if required, other text, following the AText, wouldhave a series a blanks between it and the AText.

AText And The Drawing Frame SymbolsThe AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standardsymbols appearing in the Line Summary area across the bottom of the standardISOGEN Drawing Frame, viz. for Shop Weld, Field Weld, etc. through to TracedPipe, may all be suppressed when they are not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.

Composite Text MessagesComposite text messages are made up from more than one text item and thecomposition is done by ISOGEN automatically. Such messages may be composed in either of the following two ways:-

• By combining two or more related ATexts, or • By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value.

Generally, in those cases where AText operates together with design databaseattribute information to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blankto suppress the plotting of it causes suppression of the attribute text also.

For example, if the composite message BATCH REF: 12/100A/C in the TitleBlock area needs to be completely suppressed, then setting AText -252 whichcontains the words BATCH REF to blank will cause both this and the attributepart, 12/100A/C not to be plotted.

Identification Number FormatIdentification numbers are always negative and hence must be preceded by aminus sign, for example, the AText identification number -249 on page 18 represents the default word WEST which is used in the main Isometric DrawingArea.

Grouping Of TextAll the AText listings are logically grouped into the following isometric drawingregions:- • The Main Isometric Drawing Area.

ALIAS- 14 -

• Plotted Material List and Cut List.

• Specification Change indication.• Title Block / Drawing Frame.

• Line Summary Area.

• Printed Material List.• Weld Box Summary.

• Flat Spools and Flange Rotation text.

• Compipe Material Control link.• SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display.

To enable fast look-up, the following pages list all the ATexts (together with theirassociated identification numbers) sectionalised on the above grouping basis.

ExamplesSome examples of standard AText are as follows:-

• The Material List heading ERECTION MATERIALS.• The isometric Connection Messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main

drawing area.

• The Headings BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC in the Title Block Area.

All these are default AText words that are 'programmed in' by ISOGEN but whichmay be 're-programmed' by the user to change them if required in the waydescribed below.

Example 1. ERECTION MATERIALS

This can be found on page 27 as AText identification number -310. To change theheading ERECTION MATERIALS to CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry: -310 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

would have to appear in the appropriate data input file.

Example 2. CONN. TO

This is an example of a composite Message that is used at locations where pipelines are connected to Equipment Nozzles. The AText for it can be found onpage 16 against identification number -208.

To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO the entry: -208 JOIN TO

would have to appear in the appropriate data input file. Information regarding the'joined to' component, that is, the Nozzle name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by ISOGEN to form a composite message. E.g. JOIN TO D45-NZ12.

ALIAS- 15 -


Example 3. BATCH REF

This is a another composite message example which can be found on page 25 asAText identification number -252. The message is used to convey plant Zone orArea information in the Title Block area of the isometric where the contents of theBATCH (AREA) type record in the Pipeline Input Data File is automaticallyappended by ISOGEN. E.g. BATCH REF : AR-A/TF/N12.

To remove the Batch Reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry inthe IDF to blank, thus: -252

This would have the effect of removing the entire composite message from theisometric, that is, both the AText BATCH REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference information.

The Isometric Drawing Area-201 E Denotes East at east co-ordinates.

-202 N Denotes North at north co-ordinates.

-203 W Denotes West at west co-ordinates.

-204 S Denotes South at south co-ordinates.

-205 EL + Denotes a positive Elevation at elevation co-ordinates.

-206 EL - Denotes a negative Elevation at elevation co-ordinates.

-207 ?NS Denotes the pipe Nominal Size. By setting the AText toblank the nominal size message will be suppressed.Using a? symbol will determine the format used for outputting the nominal size message.

-208 CONN. TO Denotes CONNected TO - where a Pipeline/Branchend is connected to a Nozzle.

-209 CONT. ON Denotes 'CONTinued ON' - at the point where a Pipeline/Branch end is continued onto another Pipeline.It is used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION typerecord. Is also used with AText -255 to create a'CONT. ON DRG 2' type message when a pipeline issplit into multiple drawings. (Isometric drawing areaand Material List overflow).

-210 F Denotes Flange, the letter used with the material listcross reference pointer for flanges.

-211 G Denotes Gaskets, the letter used with the material listcross reference pointer for gaskets.

-212 B Denotes Bolts, the letter used with the material listcross reference pointer for bolts.

ALIAS- 16 -


-213 SPINDLE Is used to indicate the direction of an Operating Spindleon a Valve when it is not pointing in a primary direction.

-214 MM Denotes Millimetres. Used with arrowed dimensions onAngle and Multi-way Valves to indicate leg length.

-215 REDUCING FLANGE An Identification message that points at a Reducing Flange.

-216 OFFSET This message is used where a dimensional offsetoccurs. E.g. Eccentric Reducer, Offset ReducingFlange, all forms of Offset Blocks.

User can use a ‘?’ symbol to determine format used foroutputting the offset messages. By setting this AText to‘blank’ the offset message will be suppressed.

-217 MITRE This message is used on Mitred Bends. It is used inconjunction with AText -231 'BEND').

-218 LOBSTER This message is used on Lobster Back Bends. (It isused in conjunction with AText -231 'BEND').

-219 REINFORCED An identification message that points to a ReinforcedTee or Cross when the symbol key is TERF or CRRFand no Reinforcement Pad component is called for.

-220 LEFT LOOSE A distinguishing message that points to a Flange wherethe LOOSE indicator is set.

-221 FFW Distinguishing message that points to a Field Fit Weld.

-222 FALL Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol to denote aFALLing line.

User can use a ‘?’ symbol to determine the format usedfor outputting the falling line messages By setting thisAText to ‘blank’ the falling line message will now besuppressed but the fall indication symbol will still beshown.

-223 (Normally blank) Produces a program generated degree symbol (°)which is output at all angle indicators requiring adegree symbol (bends, Falls, etc.).

-224 : This symbol is used for Falling lines specified with aratio. E.g. 1:10.

-225 (Normally blank) Produces a program generated % symbol used on Falling pipelines specified with a percentage indication.

-226 GRAD Is used where a Falling line is specified in Gradiens.

-227 PER M Is used where a Falling line is specified as an incline inMetric units. (i.e. Millimetres per Metre).

-228 PER FT Used where a Falling line is specified as an incline inImperial units. (i.e. Inches per Foot).

-229 SCREWED END The message points to a pipe end that has been set to

ALIAS- 17 -


Screwed in the Pipeline Input Data File.

-230 VENT The message points to a Vent position at any openended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-VENT type record.

-231 BEND Used in conjunction with AText -217 and AText -218 toidentify Mitre and Lobster back type Bends.

-232 SPEC Identification message points to any place in the pipewhere the Piping Specification changes. The name ofthe new Specification is automatically indicated.

-233 C Identifies a Connector as part of a Material List crossreference. e.g. C13 in a box.

-236 S Identifies a Support as part of a Material List cross ref-erence. e.g. S22 in a box.

-237 " Is the Inch sign indicator used in Imperial Dimensions,Co-ordinates and Nominal Size outputs.

-238 ' Is the Feet sign indicator used in Imperial Dimensionsand Co-ordinates.

-239 DRAIN The message points to a Drain position any Openended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record

-240 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any Open ended pipe. It is usedin conjunction with an END-POSITION-OPEN typerecord.

-241 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any Closed ended pipe. It isused in conjunction with an END-POSITION-CLOSEDtype record.

-242 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any miscellaneous pipe end. It isused in conjunction with an END-POSITION-NULL typerecord.

-243 (Normally blank) This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word(E.g. FLAT) by the user, then that text will act as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducersthat have their flat side pointing in a primary direction.(Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive).

ALIAS- 18 -


✐ The following six ATexts are used to output directions in conjunction with otherATexts on items that carry a direction setting on the component record in thePipeline Input Data File.

-244 UP

-245 DOWN

-246 NORTH

-247 SOUTH

-248 EAST

-249 WEST

-275 SWEPT TEE This message points to a Tee whose symbol key startswith the characters TS.

-276 CONT. FROM Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plottedwhen a pipeline is split onto two or more drawings. i.e.CONT. FROM DRG 1. (The text - DRG comes fromAText -255).

-277 ORIFICE FLANGE

This text points to Orifice Flanges.

-278 DIAL FACE This text points to Instruments Dials whose symbol keystarts with the characters ID and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See following note ++.

-279 L Denotes Lap Joint Stub End, the letter used with theMaterial List cross reference pointer for LJSE's.

-280 TAPPING This text points to Orifice Plates and is followed by arelevant direction letter. See following note ++.

-281 TAIL This text points to Spectacle Blinds and Slip Plates andis followed a by relevant direction letter. See followingnote ++.

-282 WINDOW This text points to a Site Glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See following note ++.

-283 FLAT Used to identify non primary flat directions on EccentricReducers. The contents of this AText will be output infront of the contents of a DIRECTION record containingthe Flat skew direction

✐ AText Numbers -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282are only output if a primary direction is set in the component record in the Pipeline Input Data File.

The appropriate direction (as defined by ATexts -244 to -249) will be appended tothe specific fitting text to make a composite message. (E.g. DIAL FACE WEST).Alternatively the content of any DIRECTION (Compound Directions) record couldbe appended.

Used in conjunction with Atexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message.

ALIAS- 19 -


-284 TEE BEND This text is plotted at Bends that have an off-line leg.

-285 RATING FLANGEThis text is a part of a facility that provides an extramessage at a Flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is achieved by giving the mat-ing Gasket a symbol key of the required rating (E.g.300#) in the Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility isonly used on Fixed Length piping.

-286 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default, but if set it will output thetext as a message on screwed Erection (Construction)fittings.

-287 ORIENTATION DIRECTION Is used to identify the direction of skewedbranches in cases where skew box indication has beensuppressed. A program generated direction will beappended to this text to form a complete message.

-288 PIPE Is used on System Isometrics to denote the position(s)of a change in the Pipeline Reference.

-298 TEE ELBOW Is used to identify a Tee Elbow fitting.

-337 D BEND RADIUSIs used to output the text D BEND RADIUS on individual Pulled Bends where the bend radius isexpressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. Thebend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUStype record in the Pipeline Input Data File and used asa prefix to this AText.

-338 BEND RADIUS Is used to output the text BEND RADIUS on individualPulled Bends where the bend radius is expressed interms of the dimensional units in use. The bend radiusvalue is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS type record inthe Pipeline Input Data File and used as a prefix to thisAText.

-346 GEARBOX ORIENTATION Is used in conjunction with directional information taken from a GEARBOX type record in thePipeline Input Data File and which is appended to thisAText.

-349 PP Is used to indicate Personal Protection type insulationon Insulation Indication symbols having the symbol key'INPP'.

-350 REDUCING ELBOW Is used to indicate a REDUCING ELBOWon fittings having the symbol key ER**.

-356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify Special typePulled Bends. Is used both on the isometric area andon the Material List.

-357 B Special ATEXT used only to identify Special type Erection Welds. Is used both on the isometric area andon the Material List.

-358 W Special ATEXT used only to identify Special type Fabrication Welds. Is used both on the isometric area

ALIAS- 20 -


and on the Material List.

-362 END$ONE Used in special circumstances when it is necessary toidentify a specific end on a Spool isometric. (It alsoappears in the Cut Pipe List section for use as a Column Heading on the Cut Pipe List).

-388 TANGENTIAL CONNECTIONUsed to identify Tangential / Offsetconnections. In cases where the Tapping Point methodis used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (ATextNo. -451) message will not be output.

-389 OFFSET CONNECTIONUsed to identify Tangential / Offsetconnections. In cases where the Tapping Point methodis used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (ATextNo. -451) message will not be output.

-390 FROM ? ORIGIN Used to identify Tangential / Offsetconnections. In cases where the Tapping Point methodis used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (ATextNo. -451) message will not be output.

-391 (Normally Blank) Used to identify Tangential / Offsetconnections. In cases where the Tapping Point methodis used, the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (ATextNo. -451) message will not be output.

-392 MULTIPLE Used where multiple component attributes are presentfor a particular material entry.

-394 TOT Used to distinguish an accumulated pipe sub-total,from an individual pipe entry.

-425 SEAL WELD Used to indicate the weld type for Seal Welds on theisometric drawing.

-433 (Normally blank) Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned set on connections.

434 STUB IN Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned set in connections.

-243 (Normally blank) This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word(E.g. FLAT) by the user, then that text will act as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducersthat have their flat side pointing in a primary direction.(Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 nclusive).

-437 (Normally blank) Used to allow metric dimensions to have their dimen-sional units output on the isometric drawing.

-451 TAPPING CONNECTION Is output along with Co-ordinate values at theTapping Point on a user defined fitting. RequiresOption Switch 122 to be set to 1 for TappingCo-ordinates output on the isometric drawing.

-452 UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT Indicates that an unacceptable drawing splitpoint has been found in Tube. When used, the

ALIAS- 21 -


message is output in the top LH corner of each affecteddrawing.

-454 CONNECTION ORIENTATION Used at un-developed Set-On Teesand Olets (which have no Branch leg and are indicatedin dotted form on the pipeline) where the intendedbranch connection is in a skewed direction. A programgenerated direction word will be appended to this textto form a composite message.

-455 (Normally blank) Used at Flange positions in vertical pipe legs to optionally indicate the elevation co-ordinate of theflange connection face. The special characters ? and $may be combined with this AText to allow the user tocontrol the final form of the output text. ? is used tocause the insertion of elevation value and $ forces anew line of text. For example, a setting of ?$FLANGEFACE would produce:-EL +22613 FLANGE FACENote that here, the EL characters are obtained by theprogram also using AText -205 automatically.

-456 SEE DETAIL ? Used to provide a cross-reference message for DetailSketches. This AText appears on the drawing part ofthe isometric. The Sketch identifying number or letter isedited in by the program at the ? position.

-457 MITRE ? Used to identify Mitre Welds. The program edits in theMitre angle into the text string at the ? position whichmay be positioned anywhere in the string.

-458 (Normally Blank) Used to indicate the Nominal Size for Metric Bore Unitse.g. if set to mm the output would be 32mm NS, if set toBlank, 32NS is output.

-459 ?THK Used to show thickness of a Penetration Plate on thedrawing.

-469 REFERENCE POINTUsed to identify a Reference Dimension Item co- ordinates.

-470 SUPPORT LOCATION Used to identify Pipe Support co-ordinates.

-477 CUT OUT ? Used on the drawing to show the location of wherematerial should be removed.

The following nine ATexts are all used for the identification of external ReferenceItems when using the Reference Dimension facility. Any associated text elementswill be automatically pre-fixed or appended, as appropriate, to the specified ATextelement.

In all these ATexts, the $ character causes a new line to be plotted and a ? character is where the program edits in the element name (from any -37, 70, 71 or72 type record) to derive the full text string.

-460 BEAM$? Identifies horizontal Steel-work element (SKEY HST*).

-461 COLUMN$? Identifies Vertical Steel-work element (SKEY VST*).

ALIAS- 22 -


-462 ?$BUILDING CL Identifies centre-line of Building (SKEY BLD*).

-463 CL EQUIPMENT$?Identifies centre-line of Equipment (SKEY EQU*).

-464 CL PIPELINE$? Identifies centre-line of Pipeline (SKEY PIP*).

-465 ?$FLOOR LEVELIdentifies specified Floor Level (SKEY FLR*).

-466 ?$WALL Identifies specified Wall position (SKEY WAL*).

-467 GRID LINE$? Identifies Project Grid Line (SKEY GRD*).

-468 ? Used for miscellaneous user defined elements (SKEYXXX*). The default ? character causes any identification name associated with the miscellaneousreference to be used when no other AText setting ismade.

-471 LOCATION-POINT?Is used to indicate a Location Point position on theplotted isometric. If more than one is included on anysingle isometric, a simple ID number is generated andoutput in the position indicated by the ?

-475 (Normally blank) Used in SPOOLGEN - Probing module. If set will beused to indicate the position of any Location Points thatare included in an incoming Pipeline Data File.

-476 (Normally blank) Used in SPOOLGEN to trigger the indication of drawingidentifiers.

-498 (Normally blank) If set by User, the text points to a Site Weld.

-499 SHOP TEST WELDPoints to either a Site Weld or a Field Fit Weld thatrequires a Shop Test Weld to be performed at the samelocation. (That is, Welds with the Key WSST or WFST).

-501 (Normally blank) Used to point to an Offshore Weld If Set By User.

-502 SUPPORT Used to indicate the orientation of a Pipe Support.Content of associated DIRECTION record (containingcompound directions for Skewed Support) is appendedto AText.

-512 TACK WELD Distinguishing message that points to a User positioned Tack Weld.

-533 FI Used to identify Field Items on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box isrequested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-534 RL Used to identify a Random Length on an Erection typeisometric whenever a new style Operations Box isrequested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-535 SU Used to identify a Pipe Support on an Erection type isometric whenever a new style Operations Box isrequested (O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-536 VL Used to identify a Valve on an Erection type isometricwhenever a new style Operations Box is requested

ALIAS- 23 -

Specification Change Indication

(O.S. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-539 . Used as a delimiter between the Material List Cross-Reference Identifier and the Suffix that is addedas a unique Component Identifier in the new style ofIdentifier (i.e. 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 as opposed to 3).

-541 _N Used as delimiter/identifier in General Note names.

-542 _S Used as delimiter/identifier in General Note names.

-543 (Normally blank) Used in SPOOLGEN Probing module. If set will beused to indicate the position of any Special Note namesthat are included in an incoming Pipeline Data File.

-544 (Normally blank) Used in SPOOLGEN Probing module. If set will beused to indicate the position of any Additional Materialsthat are included in an incoming Pipeline Data File.

-545 / Used as a separator between Part Numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated AdditionalMaterial identification on the plotted iso.

-885 - FFISYS atext for FF isometric continuation messagedelimiter.

Specification Change IndicationThe following ATexts are used for the indication of Specification Changes on theisometric drawing:-

-289 MATL Used to indicate a Piping Material Specification.change. The content of the PIPING-SPEC type recordin the Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the ATextto form a composite message.

-290 INSUL Used to indicate an Insulation Specification change.The content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record inthe Pipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText toform a composite message.

-291 TRACE Used to indicate a Tracing Specification change.The content of the TRACING-SPEC type record in thePipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText toform a composite message.

-292 PAINT Used to indicate a PAINTING Specification change.The content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in thePipeline Input Data File is appended to the AText toform a composite message.

ALIAS- 24 -


-293 (Normally blank) Reserved for User defined AText. The contents of aMISC-SPEC1 type record in the Pipeline Input DataFile is appended to the AText to form a composite message.



-296 (Normally blank) Reserved for user defined AText. The contents of aMISC-SPEC4 type record in the Pipeline Input DataFile is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-297 (Normally blank) Reserved for user defined AText. The contents of aMISC-SPEC5 type record in the Pipeline Input DataFile is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas-250 DATE The Date is taken from the DATE type record in the

Pipeline Input Data File and automatically appended inthe required format (UK, EUR or USA) to the AText.

✐ If the Date format is set to UK (see Option Switch 6 for details) this AText alsouses ATexts -258, -259, -260, -261, -262, -263, -264, -265, -266, -267, -268 and -269 to form the month part of the date output text.

-251 PROJECT NO. This is used in the Title Block if the Project Number hasbeen set in a PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in thePipeline Input Data File. The content of this record isappended to the AText to form a composite message.

-252 BATCH REF This is used in the Title Block area if a Batch Referencehas been set in a BATCH type record in the PipelineInput Data File. The content of this record is appendedto the AText to form a composite message.

-253 PIPING SPEC Used in the Title Block if a Piping Specification hasbeen set in a PIPING-SPEC type record in the PipelineInput Data File. The content of this record is appendedto the AText to form a composite message.

-254 ISS Used in the Title Block if an Issue (also know as Revi-sion) identifier has been set in a REVISION type recordin the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of this

ALIAS- 25 -


record is appended to the AText to form a compositemessage.

-255 DRG Used in conjunction with AText -256 to generate adrawing identifier of the form - DRG n OF n - in caseswhere a pipeline is split into multiple isometrics.

✐ This AText is used in conjunction with AText -209 and AText -276 to form a composite message.

-256 OF Used in conjunction with AText -255.

-257 SPL Used on spool isometric drawings for the identificationof individual spool pieces. A program generated SpoolNumber is appended to the AText to form a compositemessage. This AText is not used if either a Spool Prefix(SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or Spool Identifiers(SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type records) are included in thePipeline Input Data File.

-258 JAN Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-259 FEB Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-260 MAR Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-261 APR Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-262 MAY Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-263 JUN Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-264 JUL Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-265 AUG Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-266 SEP Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-267 OCT Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-268 NOV Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-269 DEC Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC Used in the Title Block if an InsulationSpecification identifier has been set in a INSULATION-SPEC record in the Pipeline Input DataFile. The content of this record is appended to theAText to form a composite message.

-271 TRACING SPEC Used in the title block if a Tracing Specification identifier has been set in a TRACING-SPEC typerecord in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content ofthis record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-272 PAINTING SPECUsed in the Title Block if a Painting Specification identifier has been set in a PAINTING-SPEC typerecord in the Pipeline Input Data File. The content ofthis record is appended to the AText to form a

ALIAS- 26 -


composite message.

-436 JACKET SPEC Used in the Title Block if a Jacket Specification identifier has been set in a JACKET-SPEC type recordin the Pipeline Input Data File. The content of thisrecord is appended to the AText to form a composite message.


-274 (Normally blank) If set will be used as a separator between the PipelineReference and the Spool Identifier in the Spool isometric drawing identifier.

-300 FABRICATION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'SHOP' Fabrication are listed.

-301 PT Is the Part Number heading used in conjunction withAText -302 to form a composite message.

-302 NO Used in conjunction with AText -301 to form a composite message.

-303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Is the heading in the Material Listingunder which Components are described according totheir catalogue component description.

-304 N.S. Is the heading under which the Nominal Size of eachitem is listed. Is used in conjunction with AText -330 orAText -331 to form a composite message.

-305 ITEM CODE Is the heading under which Component IdentificationCodes are listed.

-306 QTY Is the heading under which the Required Quantities arelisted.

-307 PIPE Is the group sub-heading under which Pipe is listed.

-308 FITTINGS Is the group sub-heading under which Pipe Fittings arelisted. E.g. elbows, tees, etc.

-309 FLANGES Is the group sub-heading under which all Flanges arelisted.

-310 ERECTION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'SITE' Erection (i.e.Construction) are listed.

-311 GASKETS Is the group sub-heading under which all Gaskets arelisted

-312 BOLTS Is the group sub-heading under which all Bolts are

ALIAS- 27 -


listed.

-313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS Is the group sub-heading under which allValves and In-line Items are listed.

-314 INSTRUMENTS Is the group sub-heading under which all Instrumentsare listed.

-315 SUPPORTS Is the group sub-heading under which all Supports arelisted.

-316 PIPE SPOOLS Is the sub-heading under which all Spool Numbers arelisted.

-319 CUT PIPE LENGTH Is the heading under which all the Cut Pipe Lengthsare listed.

-320 PIECE Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the CutPipe piece numbers are listed. This AText is used inconjunction with AText -321 to form a compositeheading.

-321 NO Used in conjunction with AText -320 to form a composite heading.

-322 CUT Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which theactual Cut Pipe Lengths are listed. This AText is usedin conjunction with AText -323 to form a compositeheading.

-323 LENGTH Used in conjunction with AText -322 to form a composite heading.

-324 REMARKS Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which one ofthe ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500 if applicable, willbe listed.

-325 (Normally blank) Used for Spool Number separator on the Material List.

-326 PLD BEND Used for a Pulled Bend remark which will be listedunder AText -324 if a Cut Pipe Length contains aPulled Bend.

-327 LOOSE FLG Is a remark which will be listed under AText -324 if aCut Pipe Length has a Loose Flange requirement.

-328 FF WELD Is the Field Fit Weld remark which will be listed underAText -324 if a Cut Pipe Length contains a Field FitWeld.

-329 M Used to denote lengths of Pipe are in Metres. Alsoused to indicate unit type 'Metres' in Centre-LineLength Summary.

-330 INS Used to denote Nominal Sizes are in Inches. It is usedin conjunction with AText -304 and AText -317.

-331 MM Denotes the Nominal Sizes are in Millimetres. Alsoused to indicate unit type 'Millimetres' in Centre-LineLength Summary. It is used in conjunction with AText -

ALIAS- 28 -


304 and AText -317.

-334 S Is used only on Fixed Length Piping. The contents ofthis AText is appended to the item code to form a composite code when one or more ends of the FixedLength spool has a special flange.

-335 WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO) Is used only onFixed Length piping. The contents of the AText areappended to the item description to form a compositemessage. Is used whenever AText -334 is used.

-339 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Is the group sub-heading underwhich all non-categorised components are listed.

-340 INDUCTION BEND ID - Used to identify pipe required in the fabricationof Induction Bends. The Induction Bend tag isappended to the AText to form a complete text string.

-341 EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS Is the sub-heading under which allEquipment Trim materials are listed.

-342 NOZZLE REF - Is the sub-heading under which all materials associatedwith an individual Nozzle are listed. The content of therelated NOZZLE-REFERENCE is appended to theAText to form a complete text string.Used on Equipment Trim Drawings only.

-343 CONTINUED Used with AText -342 to identify situations where thelisting of components for a Nozzle is being continuedfrom a previous drawing. Used on Equipment TrimDrawings only.

-344 END CONNECTORS Is the group sub-heading under which all materialsfor End Connectors for hygienic type piping are listed(liners, nuts, clamps, etc.).

-345 AND Used with AText -342 to form a sub-heading underwhich all components associated with interconnectedNozzles are output on the Material List for an Equipment Trim drawing. The resultant heading wouldbe of the form:- NOZZLE REF - N22 AND N23.

-347 (Normally blank) This has no default AText but is available as an alternative to the AText used when generating aMaterial List overflow message at the bottom of themaster drawing Material List (an AText -209 and AText-255 combination). Any AText set by the user will havea program generated cross reference drawing numberappended to it to form a composite message.

-348 (Normally blank) This has no default AText but is available as analternative to the AText used when generating a Material List overflow message at the top of overflowMaterial List drawings (AText -276 and AText -255combination). Any AText set by the user will have aprogram generated cross reference drawing numberappended.

ALIAS- 29 -


-351 FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND Used to identify Fabricated Bendswhen listed as separate items on the Material List.

-352 WEIGHT Column heading for Weight.

-353 KGS Units indicator for Kilogram weights. Used as part ofWeight column heading and in pipeline Weight summary area at bottom of Material List.

-354 LBS Units indicator for Pound weights. Used as part ofWeight column heading and in pipeline Weight summary area at bottom of Material List.

-355 TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG Identification text for Total Pipeline Weightin Weight column and also in Weight summary area atbottom of Material List.

-356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify special type PulledBends. Is used both on the Material List and on the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number.

-357 B Special ATEXT used only to identify special type Erection Welds. Is used both on the Material List andon the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number.

-358 W Special ATEXT only to identify special type FabricationWelds. Is used both on the Material List and on the isometric area as a prefix to the Part Number.

-359 (Normally blank) Used for bolt units sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs inDIA x LENGTH sequence.

-362 END$ONE Column heading on Cut Pipe List. (Also appears in theisometric drawing area section when it is necessary toidentify a specific End of a Cut Piece).

-363 END$TWO Column heading on Cut Pipe List.

-364 ITEM$CODE Last column heading on Cut Pipe List when Item Codeheading is required. (See also AText -365).

-365 (Normally blank) Alternative last column heading on Cut Pipe List. (Seealso AText -364). If Part Number is required on the CutList instead of Item Code then AText -364 should beset to blank and AText -365 set to the required alternative heading. E.g. PART$NO.

-366 SQ.CUT Used for Square Cut in End Condition columns on CutPipe List.

-367 BEVEL Used for Bevel in End Condition columns on Cut PipeList.

-368 SCREWED Used for Screwed in End Condition columns on CutPipe List.

-369 SHAPED Used for Shaped in End Condition columns on Cut PipeList.

-370 MITRED Used for Mitred in End Condition columns on Cut Pipe

ALIAS- 30 -


List.

-371 OFFSHORE MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components required for 'OFFSHORE' erection arelisted.

-372 REMARKS Remarks region heading at bottom of Material Listwhere Remarks text is collectively listed.

-373 REM Remarks Column heading in Material List. Remark Reference Numbers are listed in this column.

-374 ANGLE Used on special type Pulled Bends where angle information is appended to the item Description field onthe Material List.

-375 WELDS Is the group sub-heading under which all Welds arelisted.

-376 FAB Used to identify Fabrication material when Category isused as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List.

-377 EREC Used to identify Erection material when Category isused as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List.

-378 OFF Used to identify Offshore material when Category isused as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 Material List.

-379 TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT Identification text for Total Fabrication Weight in Weight column and also inWeight Summary area at bottom of Material List.

-380 TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT Identification text for Total ErectionWeight in Weight column and also in Weight Summaryarea at bottom of Material List.

-381 TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT Identification text for Total OffshoreWeight in Weight column and also in Weight Summaryarea at bottom of Material List.

-382 TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS Identification text for the TotalWeight of Unlisted Items in the Weight column and alsoin the Weight Summary Area at the bottom of the Material List.

-383 * Missing Weight indicator. The * is a special marker thatis used on both Weight and C Of G outputs to indicatethat component(s) with zero Weight were encountered.

-384 TANGENT+ Used in the REMARKS column of the Cut List to indicate where extra material has been added to a CutPiece Length in order to provide a minimum TangentLength for either a start or finish Bend Leg.

-385 CUT/WELD Used in the Cut Piece Remarks section against cutpieces that have additional material added betweenadjacent bends.

-426 GROOVED Used to indicate grooved end preparation for Victaulic

ALIAS- 31 -


pipe connections on the cut pipe list / report.

-427 FLARED Used to indicate a flared end preparation on the cutpipe list / report.

-428 SCREWED Used to indicate a female screwed end preparation onthe cut pipe list / report.

-431 SOCKET Used to indicate a female socket weld / compression /glued / push fit end preparation on the cut pipe list /report.

-472 No.? Used to output a Location Point ID number on theDrawing Frame. Will only be output when multipleLocation Points are included on a single isometric.

-473 OF Used as part of a Location Point position on the Drawing Frame.

-474 ABOVE Used as part of a Location Point position on the Drawing Frame.

-500 SHOP TEST Used on the Cut List to identify Cut Pieces that need tohave an additional Shop Test allowance. (That is,Welds with the SKEY WSST or WFST).

-503 SPOOL ID Used as either a Header or column identifier on the following Printed Output whenever Spool Identifiers arelisted.i) Printed Material List (Style 1 or 2).ii) Printed Material Control File.iii) Printed Weld Summary.

-514 REINFPAD Used as the Item Code for a Reinforcement Pad whenever automatic Item Code generation isrequested.

-515 REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @ Used as the first part of a Descriptionfor a Reinforcement Pad whenever automatic Description generation is requested. The second partof the Pad Description will be the Description of theMain pipeline Tube to which the Pad is welded.

-537 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an alternative Units indication onany Length output on any style of Material List. (Over-rules any Length Units setting in O.S. 24).

-538 (Normally blank) If set, will be used to offer an alternative form of BoltDiameter / Length output on any style of Material List.

-540 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an optional Column Heading forBolt Diameter where the Bolt units are different to thenormal Pipeline units.

ALIAS- 32 -

The Line Summary Area

The Line Summary AreaThe ATexts that are used in the Line Summary area along the bottom of the isometric drawing can either have their ATexts changed or made blank. If theAText is changed, then its' associated symbol will be drawn. If it is set to blank,then the symbol will not be drawn.

✐ In these ATexts, the inclusion of a $ sign creates a forced line feed causing thetext to be plotted over two lines.

-400 TRACED$PIPE

-401 LAGGED$PIPE

-402 PIPE$SUPPORT

-403 COMPN$JOINT

-404 SCREWED$JOINT

-405 SOCKET$WELD

-406 FIELD$WELD

-407 SHOP$WELD

-408 & -409 These two AText's have no default Text but may beused for any User specified general information on theDrawing Frame. A typical example would be:-PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE

-410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO$

1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO This is a general note to signify howSpool Numbers and Material List Part Numbers areshown on the isometric.

If only the bottom line is required the records in the Pipeline Input Data File shouldbe as shown below:-

-410 $ 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO

-411 SITE$CONNECTION

The following ATexts appear in the line summary area along the bottom of boththe plotted and printed Material Lists.

-317 PIPE NS Is used in conjunction with AText -318 to which thetotal Centre Line Length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -330 or AText -331 to indicate Units.

-318 CL LENGTH Is used in conjunction with AText -317. Also usesAText -329 or AText -331 or AText -360 or AText -361depending on Units being used

-360 FT Used to indicate unit type 'Feet' in pipe Centre-LineLength region.

ALIAS- 33 -

The Printed Material List

-361 FT-INS Used to indicate unit type 'Feet-Inches' in pipe Centre-Line Length region.

-386 Blank is the default. Used to control output of insulationlength.

-387 Blank is the default. Used to control output of heat tracelength.

The Printed Material ListThe ATexts listed below are used on the Printed Material List in addition to those ATexts listedfor the Plotted Material and Cut Pipe Lists earlier.

-332 PAGE This has a Page Number automatically appended.

-333 PIPELINE REF This has the Pipeline Reference automaticallyappended.

-336 SYSTEM REF This is used as an alternative to AText -333 when producing Material List for System Isometrics. The contents of a SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-REFERENCErecord in the Pipeline Input Data File is automaticallyappended to the AText.

The Weld Box Summary

1) Standard Weld Summary Box.

✐ The first column of this Weld Summary Box is used for the program generatedWeld Number and optional prefix. The second column is for Weld category andcontains the Shop / Field / Offshore indicators. This must be taken into accountwhen making any changes to either of these two ATexts.

-414 S Weld category identification - Shop.

-415 F Weld category identification - Field.

-416 O Weld category identification - Offshore.

Weld Box header details (line 1).

-412 WELD SHOP WELD WELDER VISUAL NDT HARD S.R FAB.QAContinuation of Weld Box header details. (line 2)

-413 NO /FLD PROC ID ACCEPT NO NO ACCEPT

ALIAS- 34 -

The Weld Box Summary

One of the above characters is plotted in the Weld Category column (column 2),depending upon the type of Weld.

2) User Defined Weld Summary Box.-417 BW Used for Weld type identifier Butt Weld.

-418 SW Used for Weld type identifier Socket Weld.

-419 MW Used for Weld type identifier Mitre Weld.

-420 LUG Used for Weld type identifier LUGG.

-421 SOF Used for Weld type identifier Slip-On Flange.

-422 SOB Used for Weld type identifier Set-On Branch.

-423 LET Used for Weld type identifier 'LET’ E.g. Olet, Latrolet,Half Coupling, etc.

-424 SLW Used to indicate the weld type for Seal Welds in weld-ing lists and reports.

-438 SEAM Weld type identifier for a Seam Weld.

-504 (Normally blank) Can be set by the User and used to identify Field FitWelds only when the Weld Category attribute is Output.

-507 RPD Used for Weld type identifier for a Basic ReinforcingPad Weld - when one extra Weld Number is requested.

-508 LF Used for Weld type identifier for a Reinforcing Pad toMain Pipeline Weld - when two extra Weld Numbersare requested. (Used together with AText -509).

-509 L4 Used for Weld type identifier for a Reinforcing Pad toBranch Weld - when two extra Weld Numbers arerequested. (Used together with AText -508).

-510 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as the delimiter between the twoMaterial List Identifiers in the 'Location' column of theOperations Box.

-511 PAD Used as a Part Identifier in the 'Location' column of theOperations Box in cases where a Reinforcement Padhas not been included on the Material List.

-513 TW Weld type identifier for a Tack Weld.

-516 TRN Weld type identifier for a Trunnion Weld. (i.e. The weldthat connects the Trunnion to the Main Pipeline).

-517 5 Used for Weld Action Identification for a Manual Weldon the Operations List.

-518 1 Used for Weld Action Identification for an AutomaticWeld on the Operations List.

ALIAS- 35 -

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

-519 EB Used for Pulled Bend identification on the OperationsList.

-520 RL Used for Random Length identification on the Operations List.

-521 FW Used for Weld type identifier for a Fillet Weld. (TheBasic Weld used for connecting Pipe Supports to thePipeline).

-522 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 toidentify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for a Reinforced Tee or Cross.

-523 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 toidentify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for an Angled(not 90°) Reinforced Tee or Cross.

-524 (Normally blank) If set, will be used as an alternative to AText -422 toidentify the Branch Connection Weld(s) for an Angled(not 90°) Set-On Tee or Cross.

-525 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for anyOlet type component with an SKEY of HCSC or HCSW.

-526 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for aReinforcement Pad to Main Pipeline Weld on anAngled Branch - when two extra Weld numbers arerequested. (Used together with AText -527).

-527 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for aReinforcement Pad to Branch Weld on an AngledBranch - when two extra Weld numbers are requested.(Used together with AText -526).

-528 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for aTrunnion to Elbow / Bend connection.

-529 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a 90°Non-Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld.

-530 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for anAngled Non-Reinforced Trunnion to Main PipelineWeld.

-531 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for a 90°Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld.

-532 (Normally blank) If set, will be used for the Weld Type identifier for anAngled Reinforced Trunnion to Main Pipeline Weld.

Flat Spools and Flange RotationThe following six ATexts are used in DIRECTION records in the Pipeline InputData File when indicating compound directions for certain components in Skewed

ALIAS- 36 -

The COMPIPE Material Control Links

Pipelines. Also used when ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION andCONNECTION DIRECTION Messages on Flat Spools.

-481 E Denotes East.

-482 N Denotes North.

-483 W Denotes West.

-484 S Denotes South.

-485 U Denotes Up.

-486 D Denotes Down.

-487 *** REFERENCE FLAT *** Used to identify which Eccentric ReducerFlat Direction is used as a reference for a given flangerotation.

-488 *** REFERENCE SPINDLE *** Used to identify which Spindle is usedas a reference for a given flange rotation.

-489 *** REFERENCE SUPPORT *** Used to identify which Support is usedas a reference for a given flange rotation.

-490 *** REFERENCE BRANCH *** Used to identify which Branch is usedas a reference for a given flange rotation.

-491 *** REFERENCE WINDOW *** Used to identify which Window is usedas a reference for a given flange rotation.

-492 FLAT DIRECTIONUsed to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure trianglesat Eccentric Reducers to indicate a Flat Direction onFlat Spools.

-493 SPINDLE DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Spindles on Flat Spools.

-494 SUPPORT DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Supports on Flat Spools.

-495 BRANCH DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped Set-On Branches orsingle Olets on Flat Spools.

-496 WINDOW DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D Skew enclosure triangles located at Sight Glasses on Flat Spools.

-497 FLANGE ROTATION ? Used to identify Flange Rotations on FlatSpools. (The calculated angle is edited in by the program at the position of the ? character).

The COMPIPE Material Control Links-299 / Single character delimiter used between the three data

items that are required to be in each ITEM-CODE

ALIAS- 37 -


record when using the COMPIPE link facility.

-453 MM- Used to separate Nominal Size and Pipeline Referencewhen ISOGEN generates a drawing number for use inthe COMPIPE.MTO file.

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen DisplayThe following 800 series ATexts are used in SPOOLGEN probing and the FFISYS.

-800 BEND

Identification of BEND when Probing.

-801 ELBOW

Identification of ELBOW when Probing.

-802 OLET

Identification of OLET when Probing.

-803 TEE

Identification of TEE when Probing.

-804 CROSS

Identification of CROSS when Probing.

-805 REDUCER

Identification of REDUCER when Probing.

-806 TEE REDUCER

Identification of TEE REDUCER when Probing.

-807 REDUCING FLANGE

Identification of REDUCING FLANGE when Probing.

-808 TEE BEND/ELBOW

Identification of TEE BEND/ELBOW when Probing.

-809 ANGLE VALVE

Identification of ANGLE VALVE when Probing.

-810 3 WAY VALVE

Identification of 3 WAY VALVE when Probing.

-811 4 WAY VALVE

Identification of 4 WAY VALVE when Probing.

-812 INSTRUMENT

ALIAS- 38 -


Identification of INSTRUMENT when Probing.

-813 MISC COMPONENT

Identification of MISC COMPONENT when Probing.

-814 PIPE (TUBE

Identification of PIPE (TUBE) when Probing.

-815 FIXED PIPE

Identification of FIXED PIPE when Probing.

-816 PIPE BLOCK

Identification of PIPE BLOCK when Probing.

-817 FLANGE

Identification of FLANGE when Probing.

-818 LJSE FLANGE

Identification of LJSE FLANGE when Probing.

-819 BLIND FLANGE

Identification of BLIND FLANGE when Probing.

-820 CONNECTOR

Identification of CONNECTOR when Probing.

-821 BACKING NUT

Identification of BACKING NUT when Probing.

-822 CLAMP

Identification of CLAMP when Probing.

-823 MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT

Identification of MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT when Probing.

-824 CAP

Identification of CAP when Probing.

-825 COUPLING

Identification of COUPLING when Probing.

-826 UNION

Identification of UNION when Probing.

-827 VALVE

Identification of VALVE when Probing.

-828 TRAP

Identification of TRAP when Probing.

ALIAS- 39 -


-829 VENT

Identification of VENT when Probing.

-830 FILTER

Identification of FILTER when Probing.

-831 SUPPORT

Identification of SUPPORT when Probing.

-832 INSTRUMENT TEE

Identification of INSTRUMENT TEE when Probing.

-833 WELD

Identification of WELD when Probing.

-834 NONE

Indication that NO component was located successfully when Probing.

-835 (Not Used)

Unused atext.

-836 (Not Used)

Unused atext.

-837 (Not Used)

Unused atext.

-838 (Not Used)

Unused atext.

-839 (Not Used)

Unused atext.

-840 Changed to Bend

‘Probing Action’ Message - Elbow changed to Bend.

-841 Flange set to Loose

‘Probing Action’ Message - Flange set to loose.

-842 Detail Sketch ?

‘Probing Action’ Message - Detail Sketch added.

-843 Support changed to Fabrication

‘Probing Action’ Message - Support changed to fabrication.

-844 Support changed to Erection

‘Probing Action’ Message - Support changed to Erection.

-845 Support changed to Offshore

ALIAS- 40 -


‘Probing Action’ Message - Support changed to Offshore.

-846 Tack Weld

‘Probing Action’ Message - Tack Weld added.

-847 Support(s) added

‘Probing Action’ Message - Support Welds added.

-848 Automatic Weld

‘Probing Action’ Message - Automatic Weld added.

-849 Shop Test

‘Probing Action’ Message - Shop Test Weld added.

-850 REDUCING-CONCENTRIC

Flange type REDUCING-CONCENTRIC selected when Probing.

-851 REDUCING ECCENTRIC

Flange type REDUCING-ECCENTRIC selected when Probing.

-852 STUB/BACKING PAIR

Flange type STUB/BACKING PAIR selected when Probing.

-853 SCREWED

Flange type SCREWED selected when Probing.

-854 SLIP-ON J TYPE

Flange type SLIP-ON J TYPE selected when Probing.

-855 SLIP-ON

Flange type SLIP-ON selected when Probing.

-856 SOCKET-WELD

Flange type SOCKET-WELD selected when Probing.

-857 WELD-NECK

Flange type WELD-NECK selected when Probing.

-858 SLIP-ON ORIFICE

Flange type SLIP-ON ORIFICE selected when Probing.

-859 WELD-NECK ORIFICE

Flange type WELD-NECK ORIFICE selected when Probing.

-860 LAP-JOINT RING

Flange type LAP-JOINT RING selected when Probing.

-861 LAP-JOINT STUB END

Flange type LAP-JOINT STUB END selected when Probing.

ALIAS- 41 -


-862 UNKNOWN

Flange type UNKNOWN selected when Probing.

-863 Material added

‘Probing Action’ Message - Indication of Additional Materials added to pipeline.

-864 General Information Note - ?

‘Probing Action’ Message - General Information Note added.

-865 Specific Information Note - ?

‘Probing Action’ Message - Specific Information Note added.

-866 Weld deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Weld deleted.

-867 Support Weld(s) deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Support Welds deleted.

-868 Spool Name deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Spool Name deleted.

-869 Flow Arrow deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Flow Arrow deleted.

-870 Message deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Message deleted.

-871 Detail Sketch deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Detail Sketch deleted.

-872 Information Note deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Information Note deleted.

-873 Additional Material deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Additional Material deleted.

-874 Loose Flange un-set

‘Probing Action’ Message - Loose Flange un-set.

-875 Location point added

‘Probing Action’ Message - Location point added.

-876 Location point deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Location point deleted.

-877 FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of FLOOR/WALL PENETRATIONwhen Probing.

ALIAS- 42 -


-878 FLOW ARROW

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of FLOW ARROW when Probing.

-879 INSULATION SYMBOL

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of INSULATION SYMBOL whenProbing.

-880 MESSAGE

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of MESSAGE when Probing.

-881 Drawing Identifier deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of Drawing Identifier deleted.

-882 Default Start

‘Probing Action’ Message - Identification of Default Start positioned.

-883 Pipeline Start

In Probing - Indication of Default Pipeline Start Point.

-884 Default Bypass Closure

In Probing - Indication of Default Bypass Closure Point.

-886 Bypass Closure

‘Probing Action’ Message - Redefined Bypass Closure Point.

-887 Pipe Support added

‘Probing Action’ Message - Pipe Support added.

-888 Pipe Support deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Pipe Support deleted.

-889 Properties Changed

‘Probing Action’ Message - Category change for Gaskets and Bolts.

-890 Coupling Added

‘Probing Action’ Message - Label showing where a Coupling has beenadded.

-891 Coupling Deleted

‘Probing Action’ Message - Label showing where an existing Coupling hasbeen removed.

-892 Pipe Support Changed

‘Probing Action’ Message - Label showing where an existing Pipe Supporthas been chnaged.

ALIAS- 43 -


Reference Plane SystemThe following ATexts are used to output the relative directions associated withReference Planes.

^ is substituted with the Reference Plane name.

? is substituted with the distance from the Reference Plane.

-443 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in e/w plane.

-444 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in e/w plane.

-445 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in n/s plane.

-446 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in n/s plane.

-447 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in u/d plane.

-448 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in u/d plane.

-449 ^ + ? Set to ‘blank’ - only outputs the Relative Position.

ALIAS- 44 -

Versions

AtextAText EditorVersion Number

ISOGENDevelopment Number

ISOGENVersion Number

SPOOLGEN / FFISYSDevelopment Number

-458 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 74C V7.16.0 PDR1654-885 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 76 V 7.16.2 FFISYS-PDRF020-849 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 77 V 7.17.0 SPOOLGEN 010-884 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 78A V 7.17.0 SPOOLGEN 008-886 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 78A V 7.17.0 SPOOLGEN 008-207 V 2.3.0 Release Notes V 8.2.0-385 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 82 V 8.2.0-459 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 81 V 8.2.0-477 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 82 V 8.2.0-889 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 80A V 8.2.0 SPOOLGEN 015-469 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 83D V 8.3.0-470 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 83E V 8.3.0-887 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 80B V 8.3.0 SPOOLGEN 008-888 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 80B V 8.3.0 SPOOLGEN 008-890 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 86B V 8.5.0 SPOOLGEN 009-891 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 86B V 8.5.0 SPOOLGEN 009-386 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 86J V 8.7.0-387 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 86J V 8.7.0-388 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 73B V 8.8.0-389 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 73B V 8.8.0-390 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 73B V 8.8.0-391 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 88C V 8.8.0-392 V 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89A V 8.9.0-424 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0-425 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0-426 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0

ALIAS- 43 -


SbSb

-427 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0-428 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0-431 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89E V 8.10.0-892 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89F V 8.10.0-436 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89D V 8.11.0-438 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89D V 8.11.0-433 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89J V 8.11.0-434 v 2.3.0 DEV. NO. 89J V 8.11.0-437 v 2.3.0 Release Notes V 8.11.0-443 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-444 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-445 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-446 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-447 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-448 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-449 DEV. NO. 91G V 8.11.7-394 Release Notes V 8.11.9

AtextAText EditorVersion Number

ISOGENDevelopment Number

ISOGENVersion Number

SPOOLGEN / FFISYSDevelopment Number

ALIAS- 44 -

Isogen Option Switches & AText Reference Guide

Documents

Transcript of Isogen Option Switches & AText Reference Guide